JP2016120218A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing increase in the number of components and a cost up, and also solving a heat problem at the periphery of a game board.SOLUTION: The game machine includes: a main stage 922 provided with a shutter face 922b capable of being displaced between an opened state where passing of a game ball to a big winning port becomes easy and a closed state where becomes difficult; and an upper unit 924'. When the main stage 922 is in a closed state, the upper unit 924' together with the main stage 922 can form a path 930' capable of suppressing a progress speed of a game ball B flown into the main stage 922, on the other hand, when the main stage 922 is in an opened state, the upper unit 924' can function not to suppress the progress speed of the game ball B flown into the main stage 922 by not forming the path 930', and when the path 930' is not formed, can guide the game ball B flown thereinto to the big winning port.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 90

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of shifting to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player.

  For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball wins (passes) a predetermined area provided on the game board, thereby shifting to a specific game state (such as a big hit game state) advantageous to the player. It is determined whether or not, and when a determination result indicating that the game is to be transferred is obtained, the game state is shifted to the specific game state.

  In the specific gaming state, the variable winning device is in an easy winning state (open state) as a plurality of advantageous games (round games, etc.), and when the game medium is won in the variable winning device in the easy winning state, a game is played to the player. A game value such as a medium is given. When a predetermined number of game media wins, the variable winning device ends one advantageous game and enters a difficult to win state (closed state).

  In addition, this type of conventional gaming machine is specified for the variable prize device by temporarily storing game media exceeding a predetermined specified number and releasing the stored game media at once. There has been proposed one having a storage device that can win more game media (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-313481 A

  However, since the conventional gaming machine includes a driving means for changing the storage device to the storage state or the release state separately from the driving means for changing the variable winning device to the easy winning state or the difficult winning state, There is a problem that the number of parts is likely to increase and the cost is likely to increase. In addition, since the driving means has heat, there is a heat problem that heat tends to stay around the game board.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress an increase in the number of parts and an increase in cost, and can solve a thermal problem around the game board.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A passing area provided in the gaming area, through which gaming media can pass;
A displacement member displaceable in a first mode in which the passage of the game medium is easy with respect to the passing region and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult;
When the displacement member is in the first aspect, the displacement member can be positioned in the first position, and when the displacement member is in the second aspect, the displacement member is A passage forming member that can be located in two positions,
The passage forming member is
When located at the second position, it is possible to form a passage with the displacement member that can suppress the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member,
When positioned at the first position, by not forming at least a part of the passage together with the displacement member, the progression speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is not suppressed as compared with when positioned at the second position. Is possible and
When at least a part of the passage is not formed, the game medium flowing into the displacement member can be guided to the passage area.

  According to such a configuration, the advancing speed of the game medium can be suppressed by the passage forming member without using a device that operates separately from the displacement member. Thus, it is possible to guide the game medium to the passing area without suppressing the traveling speed. As a result, the number of game media passing through the passage area can be adjusted without a separate storage device or the like, and the increase in the number of parts and cost increase can be suppressed, and the heat problem around the game board can be solved. .

Preferred embodiments of the present invention are:
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the displacement member has a lower portion as it progresses from one end to the other end, and has a support surface that supports the game medium from below.
The passage region is formed at least below the other end of the support surface,
The passage is formed by the support surface and the passage forming member,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the game medium can roll along the passage from one end of the support surface to the other end.
When the displacement member is in the first mode, the game medium can roll from one end of the support surface to the other end without following the passage.

  According to such a configuration, when the displacement member is in the second mode, the game medium is guided from one end portion of the support surface to the other end portion along the passage formed by the support surface and the passage formation member, and is displaced. When the member is in the first mode, it is possible to smoothly guide the game medium from the other end portion of the support surface to the passage area without any obstacles along the passage.

Preferred embodiments of the present invention are:
The game medium that rolls along the passage when the displacement member is in the second mode has a discharge port that can be discharged out of the passage before being guided to the passage area. To do.

  According to such a configuration, at least a part of the game medium whose progress is suppressed by the passage is guided to the outside of the game area through the discharge port before being guided to the passage area. It is possible to prevent the game media from passing through.

Preferred embodiments of the present invention are:
Launching means capable of launching a game medium into the game area;
In the gaming area, provided separately from the passing area, a starting passing area through which game media can pass,
Game value giving means capable of giving a game value on condition that a game medium has passed through the passing area;
Specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start passage region;
Specific game state control means that can be controlled to a specific game state on the condition that a determination result indicating the transition to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means;
Advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one advantageous game for displacing the displacement member into the first mode in the specific game state;
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a prescribed number of game media have passed through the passing area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media;
In the specific game state, the advantageous game execution means determines the time when the displacement member is in the second mode before executing the advantageous game, and a specific number of game media are emitted by the emission means to the displacement member. And can be controlled to be a specific time to flow in,
When the displacement member becomes the first mode after the lapse of the specific time, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage region, whereby the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game is defined. Can be more than a few,
In the specific game state, the number of game values given by the game value grant means per one of the game media that have passed through the passage area, and the number of executions of advantageous games executed by the advantageous game execution means, Based on the planned number of game media that can pass through the passage area according to the specific time, a planned grant quantity determining means for determining a planned grant quantity of the game value in the specific game state,
And a notifying means capable of notifying at least a part of the planned assigned quantity determined by the scheduled assigned quantity determining means.

  According to such a configuration, the number of game values given each time the game medium passes through the passage area, the number of times of execution of the advantageous game, and the displacement member become the second mode before the execution of the advantageous game. Based on the scheduled number of game media that can pass through the passing area according to the specified time, the planned value of game value in the specific game state is obtained, and at least a part of the planned value is notified. As a result, it is possible to provide notification of novel contents rich in unexpectedness and variety about how much gaming value is given in a specific gaming state, and thus enhance interest in the specific gaming state. .

Preferred embodiments of the present invention are:
Launching means capable of launching a game medium into the game area;
In the gaming area, provided separately from the passing area, a starting passing area through which game media can pass,
Game value giving means capable of giving a game value on condition that a game medium has passed through the passing area;
Specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start passage region;
Specific game state control means that can be controlled to a specific game state on the condition that a determination result indicating the transition to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means;
Advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one advantageous game for displacing the displacement member into the first mode in the specific game state;
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a prescribed number of game media have passed through the passing area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media;
The advantageous game executing means has a time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the prescribed number, to be launched by the launching means and pass through the second passage area during execution of the advantageous game. After the displacement member is set to the first mode over the first time, the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time in the second mode is defined as the sum of the first number and the first number. It is controllable so that the second number of game media exceeding the number is fired by the launching means and flows into the displacement member,
When the displacement member becomes the first mode after the second time has elapsed, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage region, so that the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game is It is possible to exceed the prescribed number,
In the specific game state, the number of game values given by the game value grant means per one of the game media that have passed through the passage area, and the number of executions of advantageous games executed by the advantageous game execution means, A scheduled grant quantity determining means for determining a scheduled grant quantity of a game value in a specific gaming state based on a scheduled number of game media that can pass through the passing area according to the first time and the second time;
And a notifying means capable of notifying at least a part of the planned assigned quantity determined by the scheduled assigned quantity determining means.

  According to such a configuration, the number of game values given each time the game medium passes through the passage area, the number of times of execution of advantageous games, and the displacement member are in the first mode and the second mode. Based on the scheduled number of game media that can pass through the passage area in accordance with the first time and the second time, the planned value of game value in the specific gaming state is obtained, and at least a part of the planned value As a result, it is possible to provide notification of novel contents rich in unexpectedness and diversity as to how much gaming value is given in a specific gaming state, and thus enhance interest in the specific gaming state. be able to.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, while suppressing the increase in a number of parts and a cost increase, the gaming machine which can eliminate the thermal problem around a game board can be provided.

1 is an external perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a principal part expansion perspective view of the game board in the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the specification of the big prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern selection table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the additional character selection table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening open process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval management processing of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game completion | finish process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the sub control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the winning effect pattern determination process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during the round of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the big prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the big prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing relevant to the big prize opening of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening-and-closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern selection table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the additional character selection table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening open process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval management process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the winning effect pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the big prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the big prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus bonus pattern selection table for the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the 1st modification of a big prize opening shutter. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the big prize opening shutter which concerns on a 1st modification. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the big prize opening shutter which concerns on a 1st modification. It is a front view which shows the 2nd modification of a game board and a variable prize apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the 3rd modification of a variable winning apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the principal part of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the internal structure of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the variable prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification from another direction. It is a top view which shows the internal structure of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a right view which shows the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a left view which shows the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is sectional drawing which shows the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is sectional drawing which shows the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a perspective view which shows the drive unit of the variable prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a part of drive unit of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a top view which shows the main components of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a front view which shows the main components of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing operation | movement of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main components of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main components of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing operation | movement of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main components of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 5th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing operation | movement of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 5th modification. It is a top view which shows the main components of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 5th modification. It is a top view which shows the main components of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 5th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing operation | movement of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 5th modification.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

  1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view of a main part of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of this embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

[Structure of gaming machine]
First, an overview of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a main body frame base in which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which a game ball can roll down is detachably provided. A front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with a main body frame 2 provided with a plate 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base) and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game board 1 can be viewed. And a front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (a player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3) A rear frame base plate (not shown) provided detachably, and a rear frame (not shown) supported rotatably by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (on the anti-player side). I have.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via the main body frame hinge 2b. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. In this state, the rear frame is Since it is accommodated in the outer frame 6, it is not shown.

  The table frame 3 has a table frame base plate 3a and various table frame components provided in the table frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right decorative member 15, left decorative member 16) and the like. In addition, a table frame structural member is not limited to these, All the members which comprise the table frame 3 are contained. In addition, in the dish unit 8, respective cover members (an upper dish upper cover 8a, a lower dish cover 8b, etc.) are attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

  In the front frame 3, the above-mentioned front frame opening 3h is provided with a protective glass 7 having transparency. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3a. In the state where the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, it is configured to face the front surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the front surface (front surface) side. Speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound effect are provided on the upper side of the front frame 3 on both upper sides of the front frame opening 3h.

  A decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of a decorative member, a top decoration 14 containing a patrol lamp which will be described later is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. A right decorative member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) that can be changed, and a left decorative member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a, etc.) are provided.

  Inside the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp / LED 27) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later is provided (see FIG. 6). . The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 and is sensed from the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 as, for example, radiated light or diffused light having excellent aesthetics. Thereby, since the change in the display mode by light can be given, the interest with respect to a game can be improved.

  Further, a plate unit 8 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The tray unit 8 is provided with an upper tray 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower tray 18 that is provided below the upper tray 17 and can store, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper tray 17 is full. Is provided.

  The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing game balls and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p that can store a game ball, an upper plate upper cover 8a that is detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper part of the upper plate main body 17p, An upper plate decoration member for improving the beauty of the upper plate 17 is provided. As an example of the upper plate decoration member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with an upper plate left decoration 17a, an upper plate front decoration 17c and the like so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Is bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a through the front side toward the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side.

  The front frame base plate 3a has a discharge outlet 20 for paying out game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a. ) And a supply port 21 for supplying the game balls discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the rear side of the front frame base plate 3a, a ball path of a game ball paid out from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), or a ball path cover (illustrated) that connects the discharge port and the supply port 21 to form a ball path. Abbreviation) is provided. When a game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout port 20, while the game ball stays near the payout port 20 while the game ball is paid out. When the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are transferred from the discharge port to the lower plate via the ball passage and the supply port 21. 18 is sent.

  In the present embodiment, a plating member is used for decoration on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the plating member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front portion of the upper plate 17. By using this plated member 17b, the decoration effect of the appearance design of the gaming machine is enhanced to improve the interest of the player.

  The upper plate upper cover 8a includes a ball lending button 23 for lending a ball, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 6) for lending a game ball (not shown), and the like. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects as a player operates (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game. In addition, although there is no restriction | limiting in particular about the arrangement configuration (position, direction) of the operation unit 9, in the drawing, as an example, the pressing operation button 9A protrudes from the upper plate upper cover 8a in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery of the pressing operation button 9A An operation unit 9 configured to be provided with a jog dial 9B is shown.

  In addition, about the front frame 3, in the part in the left side (namely, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) toward the player side from the surface (front surface), for example, fraud such as a piano wire It is possible to envisage a situation in which a member is invaded and a fraudulent act by the unauthorized member is performed on various configurations constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the part.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an unauthorized act, a cover member (not shown) with a wiring holding function is provided on the back side of the front frame 3 at a portion where the invading act by the unauthorized member is performed. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion that holds wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion that covers a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an unauthorized member such as a piano wire. It is configured by integrating a fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, since it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function having the three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering portion, and fraud prevention, it is necessary to prepare a member for each of these functions separately. Therefore, the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided on the main body frame base plate 2a. The main body frame constituting member includes a launching device 26, a speaker 10c, various control boards / relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

  In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

  The firing device 26 includes a panel body 26a for disposing the firing device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a firing handle 26b disposed on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. And a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball.

  A notch 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3 and is adjacent to the above-described dish unit 8. Positioned. Such a launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 have an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other.

  The launch handle 26b is provided in a support portion (not shown), a handle grip 26d that is rotatably attached to the support portion and can be rotated in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction, and a support ball. A firing stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing of the camera, a firing stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) for turning on / off the firing stop switch, and a handle disposed so as to cover the opening of the handle grip 26d. And a cap 26h.

  When the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the firing drive device is increased or decreased according to the rotation amount (rotation angle), and is stored in the upper plate 17 by the driving force at that time. The played game ball is launched at a predetermined timing toward the game area 1p of the game board 1 (see FIG. 3). For example, in this embodiment, 90.9 game balls can be launched per minute by the launch drive device, and one game ball can be launched approximately every 0.66 seconds. At this time, when the firing stop button 26e is operated, the launch driving device is controlled to stop, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the operation control of the firing stop switch and the firing handle 26b is performed by a payout / firing control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6). Inside the launcher 26, there is provided a spring member (not shown) for elastically urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction at all times. The game ball is fired by rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction.

  When the player interrupts the game and releases his / her hand from the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the start time position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the launch of the game ball is stopped by pressing the launch stop button 26e by a protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d.

  In addition, as a method of increasing / decreasing the launch intensity of the game ball in the launch device 26, the resistance value of the launch volume (not shown) is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b, By changing the power supplied to the launch solenoid (not shown), the launch intensity of the game ball is increased or decreased, but as other launch devices, it is linked to the turning operation of the handle grip of the launch handle. It may be provided with a launching spring (not shown) and a gear mechanism for winding (clamping) the launching spring. In such a launching device, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip of the launching handle to increase or decrease the degree of winding (clamping) of the launching spring. The firing intensity can be increased or decreased.

  The speaker 10c is provided in the center of the lower part of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound effect. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the part of the dish unit 8 in the front frame 3 (specifically, the part between the upper dish 17 and the lower dish 18). It has become.

  The game board 1 is disposed in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game ball can flow and roll. doing. The game board 1 is formed of a light-transmitting material (for example, polycarbonate), but may be formed of a non-light-transmitting material such as a plywood board.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 opens and closes the first guide rail 30, the second guide rail 30 ′, the stage 31, the first start port 32, the second start port 33, and the second start port 33. The blade member 34, the passing gate 35, the big prize opening 37, the big prize opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the big prize opening 37, the plurality of general prize winning openings 40, the out opening 41, the upper movable production member 42A, and the lower movable production member 42B. , A cover member 43, a liquid crystal display device 4, and an LED unit 5. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the passing gate 35, the big winning port 37, and the general winning port 40 form a passing region through which a game ball can pass. . The big prize opening shutter 37A is a displacement member that can be displaced into a first mode in which a game ball can easily pass through a passing area (a big prize opening 37) and a second mode in which it is difficult to close. Equivalent to. FIG. 3 shows a state where the cover member 43 is removed. The special winning opening 37, the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the cover member 43 are provided as components or parts constituting the variable winning device.

  The first guide rail 30 is disposed so as to extend from the left side toward the upper center of the game board 1 toward the game board 1, and is constituted by an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is disposed so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged on the left side of the game board 1 inside the outer rail 30A. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side.

  The second guide rail 30 ′ is arranged so as to extend from the upper right side toward the lower right side toward the game board 1, and includes an outer rail 30 </ b> C and an inner rail 30 </ b> D. The outer rail 30 </ b> C and the inner rail 30 </ b> D are for guiding the game ball from the upper right side of the game board 1 to the big winning opening 37 arranged at the lower right side. A plurality of convex portions 30E that can come into contact with the game balls flowing down between the outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D are provided at predetermined intervals on the surfaces where the outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D face each other. Yes. As a result, the game ball flowing down through the second guide rail 30 'is prevented from advancing by repeatedly coming into contact with the convex portion 30E before being released from the lower end of the second guide rail 30', resulting in a grand prize. The traveling speed of the game ball is effectively decelerated before reaching the mouth 37. The lower end of the second guide rail 30 'is located near the upper right side of the cover member 43 (see FIG. 4). As a result, the game ball released from the lower end of the second guide rail 30 ′ abuts on an upper surface 43 a of a cover member 43 to be described later, and then rolls along the upper surface 43 a toward the big prize opening 37. And move on. FIG. 3 shows a form in which the convex portions 30E of the outer rail 30C and the convex portions 30E of the inner rail 30D are arranged at equal intervals along the direction in which the game balls are guided while facing each other. These convex portions may be arranged in a staggered arrangement at positions shifted from each other along the direction in which the game balls are guided.

  The stage 31 distributes the game ball flow area in the game area 1 p and is arranged along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  The game ball launched by the launching device 26 flows down toward the lower side of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) or a stage 31 or the like driven into the game board 1. In this process, the game balls are collected by winning at any one of the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the big winning port 37, and the general winning port 40, and if the game ball is not won or passed When the player passes through the gate 35 and does not win a prize after that, it is recovered by being discharged from the out port 41.

  Note that winning means that the game ball passes through the passing area or enters the passing area. Specifically, when the game ball passes through or enters the passage area, a situation that is advantageous to the player (for example, opening of the second start opening 33, symbol lottery, prize ball, etc.) is given. Means. At this time, passing through the passing area by the game ball means simply passing, and entering the passing area by the game ball means collecting the game ball separately from the out port 41. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, the passing and the entering are substantially synonymous. Accordingly, both the passing of the game ball to the passing area and the entering of the game lead to winning, and therefore, in the following description, it is unified as “winning” unless otherwise specified.

  When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively small, since the launch force applied to the game ball is generally small, the game ball flows down mainly on the left side of the stage 31. When the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively large, the launch force applied to the game ball is generally large, so that the game ball flows down on the right side of the stage 31 or along the second guide rail 30 ′. . In general, the method of hitting the game ball down to the left side of the stage 31 is called “left-handed”, and the method of hitting the game ball down along the right side of the stage 31 or along the second guide rail 30 ′ is “ It is called “right-handed”.

  The first start port 32 and the second start port 33 provide a lottery opportunity on the condition that a game ball wins (passes), and displays the result of the lottery in the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. It gives the opportunity to do.

  The first start port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball wins the first start port 32, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 32 is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

  The second start port 33 is provided directly below the first start port 32. When a game ball wins the second start port 33, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The second start port 33 is determined to be difficult to win by a blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball to the second start port 33 is detected by the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

  The blade member 34 opens and closes so as to have a forward tilting / retreating posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and an open state that allows a game ball to be awarded to the second start port 33, This is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult to win a game ball at the start port 33. The blade member 34 is driven by a blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

  Note that the ordinary electric accessory is not limited to one that opens and closes the blade member 34 in the front-rear direction, but for example, a so-called electric tulip type that widens the starting port by rotating in the left-right direction of the game board 1. Or a tongue-like member that opens and closes the start port by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

  The passage gate 35 provides an opportunity to open the second start port 33. The winning of a game ball to the passing gate 35 is detected by a passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins the passing gate 35, no winning ball is generated.

  The big prize opening 37 is opened in a winning game state (such as a big hit game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. The big winning opening 37 is provided at the lower right side of the game area 1p and substantially at the right side of the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33. In addition, the position where the special winning opening 37 is arranged is not limited to the position described above, and can be changed as appropriate according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  The big winning opening 37 includes an opening having a relatively large size in the left-right direction so that a plurality of game balls can win simultaneously. The special winning opening 37 is formed by the special winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A and the cover member 43. The special winning opening 37 is formed as an open opening between the front face of the game board 1 and the cover member 43 when the special winning opening shutter 37A is in an open state, and is closed when the special winning opening shutter 37A is in a closed state. It becomes.

  The special winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A is a plate-like member having a relatively large longitudinal dimension along the left-right direction so as to cover the special winning opening 37. The size in the short direction of the big prize opening shutter 37A is about the diameter of the game ball. The special prize opening shutter 37A is provided so as to protrude and retract in the front-rear direction of the game board 1. In the special winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A, the state protruding forward of the game board 1 becomes a closed state in which the special winning opening 37 is closed, and the state retracted to the rear of the gaming board 1 becomes an open state in which the special winning opening 37 is opened. . The upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37A is an inclined surface with a relatively gentle downward-sloping tendency in the closed state. The special winning opening shutter 37A is driven to be opened and closed by a special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

  As shown in FIG. 4, the cover member 43 is disposed so as to face the big prize opening shutter 37 </ b> A. The cover member 43 has an upper surface 43 a that is connected to the closed large winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A, a front end guide portion 43 b, and an opening 43 c corresponding to the large winning opening 37. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the upper surface 43a extends from the lower end of the second guide rail 30 'to the right end of the big prize opening 37 (opening 43c), and is relatively gently lowered to the left. Make a trend slope. The upper surface 43a is disposed so as to lead to the big winning opening 37 (opening 43c) located at the left end while supporting the plurality of game balls emitted from the second guide rail 30 '. The front end guide portion 43b forms an upright wall and is formed to extend from the right end of the upper surface 43a to the left end of the special winning opening 37 (opening 43c). On the inner surface of the front end guide portion 43b, a plurality of convex portions 43d that can come into contact with the game ball are provided at predetermined intervals. In addition, a plurality of convex portions 1d that can come into contact with the game ball are also provided at predetermined intervals on an appropriate front portion of the game board 1 that faces the front end guide portion 43b. The convex portion 1d of the game board 1 and the convex portion 43d of the cover member 43 are arranged in a staggered manner at positions shifted from each other along the traveling direction of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball that rolls along the upper surface 43a and the front end guide portion 43b repeatedly abuts on the convex portions 1d and 43d alternately while moving to the left end of the big prize opening 37 (large prize opening shutter 37A). The progress of the game ball is effectively decelerated before passing through the special winning opening 37 (large winning opening shutter 37A). The upper surface 43a, the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the front end guide portion 43b form a passage through which a game ball can flow when the special winning opening shutter 37A is in a closed state, and suppress the progression of the flowing game ball. The suppression part 430 is formed. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the opening 43 c is disposed at a position corresponding to the big prize opening shutter 37 </ b> A and forms the big prize opening 37. A ball passage (not shown) for collecting game balls and a big prize opening count switch 370 are provided at the location of the game board 1 located inside the cover member 43. The game ball that has dropped from the open big winning opening 37 is led to the big winning opening count switch 370 through the ball passage, and is detected as a win by the big winning opening count switch 370. In addition, the detailed configuration and operation related to the special winning opening 37 will be described later.

  One or more general winning ports 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 40, a lottery is not performed, but a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6). The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, as the normal gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 60 described later, the non-probability / non-short-time gaming state and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery are not probable. There is a probability variation gaming state (special gaming state) that becomes higher than the non-temporary gaming state, and a time-short gaming state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-probabilistic non-temporary gaming state, and the special symbol in the normal gaming state When the lottery is won, the game shifts to a big hit game state (specific game state).

  In the short-time gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is in a high probability state, so that the winning to the second starting port 33 is facilitated by the support of the blade member 34 as a normal electric projectile. This state is a so-called “electric support”, and it becomes easy to store a reserved ball of a special symbol game, which will be described later, and it is possible to suppress the loss of the game ball by winning the second start opening 33. Specifically, the short-time gaming state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time-short gaming state 1), a state in which the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (short-time gaming state 2). ), Which means at least one of the states in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory is relatively long (time-short game state 3). For example, the short-time gaming state includes a state in which the short-time gaming state 1, the short-time gaming state 2, and the short-time gaming state 3 proceed simultaneously with any combination. In such a short time gaming state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit gaming state is improved.

  In this embodiment, after the end of the big hit gaming state, it will surely shift to the probabilistic / time-saving gaming state (the normal gaming state that is the probability-changing gaming state and the time-saving gaming state), and the non-probable / non-time-short gaming state (non-probability changing gaming state). Therefore, the game is not shifted to the normal game state which is a non-time-saving game state. On the other hand, the normal game that is in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state when the symbol variation number of the special symbol game (the number of games) reaches a predetermined number without shifting to the big hit gaming state in the probability variation / short time gaming state Transition to the state.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit gaming state, 10 special symbol lotteries (10 special symbol variation display or stop display) were performed in the probability variation / short time gaming state. In addition, the game shifts to a non-probability / non-short-time gaming state. It should be noted that the probabilistic / short-time gaming state may be maintained until the next jackpot gaming state is entered after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the following description, the probability variation gaming state that ends by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries as in the present embodiment is also referred to as an ST (Specia1 Time) gaming state.

  The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a state of being retracted behind the game board 1 when not in operation, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing a specific effect. Is arranged. The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the center of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs a rotating operation and light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower portion of the display area 4A and emits light when a specific effect is performed.

  The LED unit 5 informs the player of each gaming state and the lottery result. As shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol display unit 51, the normal symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, the first 2 has a special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol hold display unit 55, a second special symbol hold display unit 56, and a round display unit 59. Although not shown in particular, the lamp / LED 27 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the game board 1 or the like includes a lamp corresponding to the character appearance notification lamp, and the normal transition to the big hit gaming state is confirmed. It is lit (or flashes) when a special symbol changes in the gaming state, or when an additional character to be described later appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit gaming state.

  The normal symbol display unit 51 determines whether or not to open the second starting port 33 by driving the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory when the game ball wins the passing gate 35. The lottery result for “game” is displayed. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be turned on in red and blue, for example. In the normal symbol game, the LED lamp 511 is lit in red when winning, while it is lit in blue when lost in the normal symbol game. When the lighting mode of the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display unit 51 is, for example, a red lighting mode, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is allowed. In addition, other lighting modes may be used as the lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game, for example, the lighting state or the blinking state in the case of winning, and the lighting state in the case of losing. It may be.

  In the normal symbol hold display unit 52, a new game ball wins the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing a variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524. In this case, the number of times that the normal symbol variation display that has been put on hold for performing the variation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 from the next time onward is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524 are positioned on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 51, and are arranged side by side with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524, for example, when the hold number is “1”, the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, and 524 are turned off. When the number of holdings is “2”, the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is “3”, the LED lamps 521, 522, and 523 are turned on, and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of holds is “4”, all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524 are lit.

  The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 indicate the result of the winning lottery for the “special symbol game” and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol serving as identification information (hereinafter referred to as “first special symbol”) in response to the winning of a game ball at the first starting port 32, and the first The winning lottery result based on the winning at the start port 32 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of a symbol serving as identification information (hereinafter referred to as “second special symbol”) in response to the winning of a game ball at the second starting port 33, and the second The winning lottery result based on the winning at the start port 33 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the second special symbol.

  The variation display of the symbols by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed, for example, by using a 7-segment LED and the like, and each segment individually turning on and off. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (symbol) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. At this time, the plurality of winning symbols displayed with the first special symbol and the plurality of winning symbols displayed with the second special symbol are different from each other. The winning symbol of the first special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and there is a nominal jackpot symbol such as “probability variation 1” that indicates that the transition to the probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. (See FIG. 7). The winning symbol of the second special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and the designations such as “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” that indicate the transition to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. And a small hit symbol of a name such as “small hit” that triggers the transition to the so-called small hit gaming state (see FIG. 7). That is, the winning symbol of the first special symbol does not have a small hitting symbol that triggers the transition to the small hit gaming state, and the winning symbol of the second special symbol hits the small hit that triggers the transition to the small hit gaming state There is a design. The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 are not limited to 7-segment LEDs or the like, and may be, for example, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, and 554. When the LED lamps 551, 552, 553, and 554 are turned on or off, the first special symbol display unit 53 is displayed. Alternatively, when the second special symbol display unit 54 displays a variation of the symbol for the special symbol game, when a new game ball is won at the first starting port 32, the first special symbol for the next special symbol game is displayed. The number of times the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held on the screen can be executed (the number of hold) is displayed. The second special symbol hold display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, and 564. When the LED lamps 561, 562, 563, and 564 are turned on or off, the first special symbol display unit 53 is displayed. Or, when the second special symbol display unit 54 displays a variation of the symbol for the special symbol game, when a new game ball is won at the second starting port 33, it is reserved for the symbol variation display for the special symbol game after the next time. In addition, the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol display unit 54 can be executed (the number of suspensions) is displayed. Each of the 1st special symbol reservation display part 55 and the 2nd special symbol reservation display part 56 is arranged side by side up and down, and is located above the normal symbol reservation display part 52. The display mode of the number of holds in the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the hold number by the normal symbol hold display unit 52.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 are moved to the first start port 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed. A game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port 33. If it is, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbol that has been variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 that has been suspended The symbol variation display is started.

  Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first start port 32 and the second special symbol display unit 54. 2 The number of variable display suspensions of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of a game ball at the start port 33 is four at the maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is the main RAM 63 (FIG. 6) is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (0) as the start memory (start memory information), and the information of the four first special symbol games that are held is stored in the first special symbol start memory area ( 1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), which is stored as the start storage. Similarly, when the second special symbol game is held four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area ( 0) is stored as the start memory, and the information of the second special symbol game for the four times held is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). Remembered. Accordingly, the total number of winning holds in both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is eight in total.

  In addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, in the liquid crystal display device 4 The winning suspension to the first starting port 32 and the winning suspension to the second starting port 33 may be displayed.

  The round display unit 59 is lit while the winning symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of round games (round games) to be described later when the big hit gaming state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the big hit gaming state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591, 592, 593. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds is basically defined as 16 rounds (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “16R”). In this case, the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. To do. Note that the number of rounds (number of times) may mean the total number of times a round game (round game) is executed, or may indicate the number of orders indicating the order in which round games are executed sequentially. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, for example, “16th round” or “16R” is described, and when the latter is meant, for example, “16th round” or “16Rth” is written. In the following description, “round game” may be simply referred to as “round”.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged behind the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged at the approximate center so that the player can see it. In addition to the result of winning lottery based on winning of game balls to the mouth 32 and the second starting port 33, various images relating to the game, for example, an identification pattern for performance, an effect image in the normal game state, an effect in the big hit game state An image, a demonstration image for demonstration display, and the like are displayed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the variation of the identification information on condition that the game ball has won the first start port 32 or the second start port 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 constitute notification means.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW”, and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

  The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 that is a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 that is a readable / writable memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. It has. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

  The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 62.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first start port switch 320 disposed behind the first start port 32. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second start port switch 330 disposed behind the second start port 33. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

  The first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330 receive a predetermined detection signal as a winning when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first start port 32 and the second start port 33. This is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected with a pass gate switch 350 disposed behind the pass gate 35. When a game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 350, a normal symbol lottery is performed on the assumption that the game ball has won the pass gate 35. The result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 51, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may make it do.

  The passing gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 as a winning when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 35. Thereby, the pass gate switch 350 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 33.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a general winning port left switch 400A and a general winning port right switch 400B disposed behind the general winning port 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a predetermined number of winning balls are played by the payout device 83.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a big prize port count switch 370 disposed below the big prize port 37. The big prize opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the big prize opening 37. When a winning of the game ball is detected by the big winning port count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of game balls as a winning ball through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 or the lower plate 17 or the lower plate. Dispensing to the plate 18. The big prize opening count switch 370 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 when the game ball passes through the big prize opening 37.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a special prize opening shutter solenoid 370A for driving a special prize opening shutter 37A that opens and closes the special prize opening 37. As a result, the special winning opening shutter 37A is driven so as to change between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 37 and a closed state in which a winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult. When the special winning opening 37 is opened by such a special winning opening shutter 37A, the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54, and the big winning game state is set. Performed when migrated.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 51 in the predetermined light emission mode, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball enters the second start port 33. It becomes easy.

  For example, in the normal symbol game of this embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal symbol in a gaming state that is not the short-time gaming state (“non-probability change / non-short-time gaming state” in this embodiment) is 0/257, and the blade member 34 Will never be released. On the other hand, the normal symbol hit probability in the high probability state (time-short game state) is, for example, 257/257, and when this is won, the blade member 34 is released for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. Further, the number of normal symbols that become a winning symbol in the normal symbol game is one, and the winning count number that is the upper limit when the second start port 33 is opened is 10 counts (10).

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 displays the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 when the game ball is detected by the first start port 320 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed. The first one based on the winning of a game ball at the first start port 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 The number of the special symbol variable display execution (start) is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variability display of the first special symbol that has been reserved as the number of the reserved symbols relating to the first special symbol is started.

  When the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol hold display unit 56, when the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 330, the second special symbol hold display unit 56 The second based on the winning of a game ball at the second start port 33 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of suspension (execution) of the special symbol variation display (ie, the number of suspensions related to the second special symbol) is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variability display of the second special symbol that has been suspended as the number of the reserved symbols related to the second special symbol is started.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the priority order of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. . Note that the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 may be variably displayed in the order of winning in accordance with the winning order.

  In addition, as described above, the upper limit is set for the number of suspensions in which the execution of the special symbol variable display is suspended. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 places the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 in the upper limit. When the game ball is won and the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, the maximum number of the variable display hold numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4 each. (That is, up to 4 detection times), and the fifth and subsequent numbers are not stored as the number of holdings. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable symbol display, the number of holdings is again added up to four.

  When the number of first special symbol games held in the first special symbol display unit 53 is held, for example, up to four, the information on the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is stored in the main RAM 63. One special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as a start storage, and thereafter, information on special symbol games corresponding to four holding numbers is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. Sequentially stored as starting memory.

  Similarly, in the case of the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of the second special symbol game held is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the number of holdings is 4 in the main RAM 63. 2 are sequentially stored as starting memories in the special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4).

  Therefore, the total number of game balls held in the special symbol game associated with winning in the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is 8 in total, and the first special symbol hold display section 54 and the second special symbol are displayed. The number of hold displays by the LEDs 551 to 554 and the LEDs 561 to 564 of the hold display section 55 is also four.

  In the open state of the big prize opening 37 by the big prize opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the big prize opening count switch 370 becomes a predetermined number (in the present embodiment, one winning number) or in advance. It is maintained until one of the conditions such as a specified later-described opening time elapses is satisfied. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the big prize opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the big prize opening shutter 37A is driven so as to close the big prize opening 37.

  In the big hit gaming state, the open state and the closed state of the big winning opening 37 are repeated based on a preset big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit gaming state, a game in which the big winning opening 37 is opened and closed a plurality of times based on a big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later is referred to as a “round game (round game)”. A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. Regarding the state from when the grand prize opening 37 is closed by one round game until the grand prize opening 37 is opened as the next round game, “inter-round game” or “inter-round interval” or Also simply called “interval”. In the present embodiment, the big prize opening 37 is opened and closed only once in one round, but in other examples, the big prize opening 37 is opened several times in one round. And there may be a closed state. In addition, when a plurality of big prize openings are provided, it is possible to exclusively control the open / closed states of the plurality of big prize openings in one round. That is, in one round, while one large winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the remaining large winning openings are continuously closed.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided with a so-called small hit game state as a game state having a property different from that of the big hit game state. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and in the small hit gaming state of the present embodiment, it is prescribed that the big winning opening 37 is opened only once. . Of course, in the small hit gaming state, an arbitrary or specific big winning opening may be controlled to be repeatedly opened a plurality of times. This small hit game state is a game state that shifts when a small hit is made by special symbol lottery. The game state basically does not change before and after the transition to the small hit gaming state. For example, in the non-probability changing gaming state, when the small hit win is made and the game state is shifted to the small hit gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state remains the non-probability changing gaming state before the transition to the small hit gaming state. Therefore, there is no transition to the probable gaming state. Similarly, when a small hit win is made in the probability variation gaming state and a transition is made to the small hit gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state is the small hit gaming state as long as the number of games in the probability variation gaming state remains. It remains in the probability change gaming state before the transition to, and does not shift to the non-probability variation gaming state.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including the drawings to be referred to in connection with the description), with respect to “round” with numbers such as 1 round or 1st round, for example, 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc., simply “R In the case of a single round game, when the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, the specified number of winnings per round is reached before the open state is opened. Will close the round winning game without closing the big winning opening for the remaining number of times of opening.

  In the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is made up of numbers, except for specific cases, during the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. Symbols (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as “0”, “1”, “2”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol that has been variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Further, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the special symbol that has been changed or stopped is in a specific stop display mode, the player is made to know that it is a “hit”. The effect image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Specifically, in any one of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the special symbol is, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to “big hit” that can be obtained by many balls. When the display is stopped, the combination of effect decorative symbols displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 has a specific display mode (for example, a state where all the same symbols are arranged in a plurality of symbol rows) In addition, an effect image for a big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  A specific example of the control of the main CPU 61 will be described later.

  The main ROM 62 stores programs for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes to be described later, and various tables.

  The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, other readable / writable storage media can be used instead of the main RAM 63.

  The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

  The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

  The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub-control circuit 70.

  The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by quickly supplying power to the main RAM 63 when power is cut off.

  Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A, a blade member solenoid 340, and an external terminal board 80.

  The external terminal board 80 is connected to an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall, or a call device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots. For data communication.

  The various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start port switch 320, a second start port switch 330, a pass gate switch 350, a big winning port count switch 370, a general winning port left switch 400A, and a general winning port. A right switch 400B and a backup clear switch 81 are included.

  The backup clear switch 81 clears backup data of the main control circuit 60 and a payout / launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, in response to an operation of the hall manager.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to the launching device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 via the payout / launch control circuit 82.

  The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / firing control circuit 82. The payout / launch control circuit 82 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 83, and is connected to the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize a game value giving means.

  The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal for requesting lending of game balls in accordance with a player's operation, and signals can be transmitted to and received from the ball lending operation panel 85. .

  The payout / launch control circuit 82 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and a lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. This causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. For example, the payout device 83 pays out three game balls as the number of winning balls per winning prize to the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33, and as the number of winning balls per winning prize to the general winning opening 40. Ten game balls are paid out, and 15 game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls per winning prize to the big prize opening 37.

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 is a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the shooting handle 26b of the shooting device 26 is gripped by the player and rotated in the clockwise direction. Is supplied with electric power, and the game ball is controlled to be launched toward the game area 1p.

  The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes a timer interrupt process as an interrupt process even during execution of a main process described later. The timer interrupt process is executed in response to an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60 and is configured to be supplied with commands from the main control circuit 60.

  The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and includes a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. A circuit 76, a sound control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79; The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the audio control circuit 77. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to the movable effect device 42 including a motor and a mechanism for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

  The sub-control circuit 70 is connected to a push-down button switch 90A provided on the push-down button 9A and a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B. The push operation button switch 90A detects the operation of the push operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. The sub-control circuit 70 is supplied with a pressing operation signal from the pressing operation button switch 90A and is supplied with a rotation operation signal from the jog dial switch 90B.

  The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60.

  A specific example of the control of the sub CPU 71 will be described later.

  The program ROM 72 stores programs for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects and various tables.

  The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

  The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

  The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by quickly supplying power to the work RAM 73 when power is cut off.

  The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 71. For example, the display control circuit 76 generates an image data processor (VDP) and various image data. The image data ROM is configured to store data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores image data to be displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Examples of the image data include decorative design image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

  The display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an image is displayed based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

  The sound control circuit 77 is for performing control related to sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. For example, a sound source IC that performs control related to sound, a sound data ROM that stores various sound data, a sound signal, and the like. An amplifier (AMP) for amplifying the signal is included. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. In response to the sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71, the sound source IC is used to select one of a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. Audio data can be selected.

  The sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c.

  The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamp / LED 27 including a decoration lamp and the like, and includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It is composed of The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, in the big hit gaming state, the movable effect device control circuit 79 operates (oscillates) the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by operating the push-down operation button 9A during the effective period of the operation on the operation unit 9. Etc.) may be controlled.

[Specifications of gaming machines]
Next, the specifications regarding the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot gaming state is 1 / 99.75 (657/65536) when the probability is low (non-probability variable gaming state), the high probability In time (probability game state), it is 1 / 1.05 (5020/65536). The small hit probability of the special symbol in the small hit gaming state is 1 / 29.92 (2190/65536) in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The order of digestion of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is digested in preference to the lottery based on the second special symbol. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), an ST gaming state in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to a maximum of 10 times as the number of games (the number of variations of the special symbol) is implemented.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the first special symbol jackpot symbol “probability change 1”, the winning opening / closing pattern (winning pattern) is the winning pattern 1, and the round game round number is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds that are easy to win in the big winning slot is 7R), the bonus name indicating the effect mode in the big hit gaming state is “normal bonus”, and the bonus content is “7R bonus”. This “normal bonus” has an estimated number of winnings from 1R to 7R and 0 from 8R to 16R for winning at the big winning opening 37. Thereby, in the “normal bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 105. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability change 1” as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 100/100. In the present embodiment, “bonus” means a notification effect related to the number of prize balls.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability change 1”, the winning pattern is 2, and the round number 16R (the actual round number is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is “large extra bonus”, and the bonus content is “large extra bonus” Bonus ”. With regard to the “large bonus”, with regard to winning at the big winning opening 37, the estimated number of winnings from 1R to 7R is one and the estimated number of winnings from 8R to 16R is four. As a result, in the “large bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 645. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability variation 1” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 35/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 2”, the winning pattern is 3, and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “middle bonus 1”, and the bonus content is “medium” The bonus is 1 ”. The “medium bonus 1” has an estimated number of winnings from 1R to 7R and 3 from 8R to 16R for winning at the big winning opening 37. As a result, the number of planned award balls is 510 for “middle bonus 1”. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability 2” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 20/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 3”, the winning pattern is 4 and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “medium bonus bonus 2”, and the bonus content is “medium” The bonus is 2 ”. “Nakagami Bonus 2” is an estimated number of winnings for the 1R to 7R, 2 for the 8R and 9R, and 10 for the 10R and 11R. The number of winnings is 3, the estimated number of winnings in the 12th R is 1, and the estimated number of winnings in the 13th to 16Rs is 4. As a result, the number of planned award balls is 510 for “middle bonus 2”. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability variation 3” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability variation 4”, the winning pattern is 5, round number 16R (the actual round number is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is “small extra bonus 1”, and the bonus content is “small” The bonus is 1 ”. “Small top bonus 1” has an estimated number of winnings from 1R to 7R and two estimated winning numbers from 8R to 16R for winning at the big winning opening 37. As a result, in the “small extra bonus 1”, the planned number of winning balls is 375. The probability (entrance rate) of “probability variation 4” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 15/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability variation 5”, the winning pattern is 6 and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “small extra bonus 2”, and the production content is “small” The bonus is 2 ”. In the “small bonus 2”, the estimated number of winnings from the 1R to 13R is 1 and the estimated number of winnings from the 14R to 16R is 4 for winning at the big winning opening 37. As a result, in “small extra bonus 2”, the planned number of winning balls is 375. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability 5” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 6”, the winning pattern is 7, and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “no extra bonus”, and the bonus content is “no extra” Bonus ”. In the “no extra bonus”, the estimated number of winnings from 1R to 16R for the winning in the big winning opening 37 is one. As a result, in the “no extra bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 240. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability 6” as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the small bonus symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the winning pattern is 8, and the bonus name and bonus content are “small bonus”. The rush rate of the small hit symbol is set to 100/100. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state does not have the concept of a round game, so the number of rounds is not defined.

  The number of winning prizes corresponds to a specified number of winnings that triggers when the winning prize opening 37 is changed from the open state to the closed state in one round. In this embodiment, the number of winning points (specified number of winnings) Is set to “1”. That is, when one winning prize is counted in the round winning prize opening 37, the big winning prize opening 37 is changed from the open state to the closed state. It should be noted that the number of winning prize counts (specified number of winnings) does not define the upper limit of the number of winnings in one round. In other words, even when a winning exceeding the number of large winning mouth counts is detected in one round, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning number is paid out. As a result, over-winning that exceeds the number of large winning mouth counts is possible. This point will be described later.

  The short-time performance (specification of the short-time gaming state) is set so that the short-time gaming state continues for a high probability (while in the probability variation gaming state). The number of winning balls will be 3 per winning prize at the starting opening (first starting opening 32 and second starting opening 33), 10 per winning prize at the general winning opening 40, It is set to be 15 per winning prize. The normal symbol hit probability is set to 0/257 when the probability is low and 257/257 when the probability is high. The number of symbols per normal symbol is set to one. The winning count when the second start port 33 is opened is set to count up to 10 as an upper limit.

  The specifications may include the following contents. For example, for special symbols, the jackpot probability at the low probability and the high probability is not limited to the above. In other words, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win the jackpot when the probability is high than when the probability is low. The small hit probability is not limited to the above. For example, the specification may be such that the winning probability in the other special symbol is higher than that in one special symbol. The special symbol digestion order may be a winning order without setting the priority order for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be a specification for preferential digestion of the first special symbol. The number of STs in which the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to the above. Further, the probability variation gaming state may continue until the next big hit win. The number of rounds is not limited to the above, and other round numbers other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The types of jackpot symbols are not limited to those described above. For example, you may increase the kind of jackpot symbol of a 1st special symbol. Further, an extra bonus may be executed even in the big hit gaming state based on the first special symbol. In the present embodiment, the number of winning prizes (specified number of winnings) is set to “1”, but is not limited thereto. For example, the number of winning prizes may be set to 2 or more. In such a case, it is desirable to provide a large winning opening shutter or the like that allows more game balls than the large winning opening count to pass simultaneously. The short time performance may be greater than the ST count (the number of games in the probability variation gaming state), or may be less than the ST count including, for example, 0. The number of winning balls is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of winning balls related to the big winning opening is set to a value different from the above, the estimated number of winning balls is calculated using the value and the estimated winning number, and the number of extra balls to be described later is notified. Can be. For normal symbols, the hit probability at the low probability and the high probability is not limited to the above. For example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win when the probability is high than when the probability is low, and may be won when the probability is low, for example. The number of symbols per normal symbol is not limited to the above, and may be two or more, for example. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that the opening patterns of the blade members are associated with each other differently. The number of winning counts at the second start port may be a value other than those described above.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, three types of opening / closing patterns A to C are defined as one round opening / closing patterns (one round opening / closing patterns) for the special winning opening 37. The open / close patterns A to C are open / close patterns corresponding to the big hit game state, and the open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern corresponding to the small hit game state. The opening / closing pattern C in the small hit gaming state is not defined as one round, but is shown as an opening / closing pattern for one round for convenience. The open / close patterns A to C shown in FIG. 8 are merely examples, and the number of types, specific times for defining the open / close patterns, and the like may be other than illustrated.

  The open / close pattern A is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues for 10 s. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round interval from the first opening state to the final closing state. Similarly, in the other opening / closing patterns B and C, the round section is defined as a period from the first opening state to the final closing state. The section in which the open state is 10 s is a long open in which the open state of the special winning opening 37 is relatively long. That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, the long opening occurs once, and the opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 10 s.

  The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues for 5 seconds. The opening / closing pattern B is defined as a round interval from the first opening state to the final closing state. In the section in which the open state is 5 s, the middle winning opening is shorter than the long opening in the open state of the special winning opening 37. That is, in the opening / closing pattern B, middle opening occurs once, and the opening time of the opening / closing pattern B is 5 s.

  The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern in which the open state is only 0.1 s. The section in which the open state is 0.1 s is a short opening that is considerably shorter than the middle opening. That is, the open / close pattern C is a pattern in which the short circuit is opened only once, and the open time of the open / close pattern C is 0.1 s.

  The substantial round game in the big hit game state is a round game when the opening / closing control is performed based on the opening / closing patterns A and B including the long opening or middle opening in which the game ball can be won among the opening / closing patterns A to C described above. Applicable. The round game when the opening / closing control is performed based on the opening / closing pattern C is a non-real round game that does not correspond to the real round game.

  Note that the following contents may be used as the open / close pattern of one round. The open patterns are not limited to the above three types, and may be two types or less or four types or more. For the opening / closing pattern A, the opening time is not 10 s but may be, for example, less than 10 s or more than 10 s, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can win. Moreover, you may make it open | release in multiple times instead of opening only once in 1 round. For the opening / closing pattern B, the opening time is not 5 seconds, but may be, for example, less than 5 seconds or more than 5 seconds, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can win. Moreover, you may make it open | release in multiple times instead of opening only once in 1 round. Furthermore, the opening / closing pattern A and the opening / closing pattern B may have the same opening time, or the opening / closing pattern B may have a longer opening time than the opening / closing pattern A. For the opening / closing pattern C, the opening time is not 0.1 s, but may be, for example, less than 0.1 s or more than 0.1 s. Moreover, you may make it open | release in multiple times instead of opening only once in 1 round.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the round interval in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of winning patterns 1 to 8 are defined as the special winning opening and closing patterns (winning patterns). The winning pattern 1 occurs in the case of a normal bonus, and the number of rounds defined for the open round (hereinafter referred to as “specified number of rounds”) and the long opening or middle that enables winning to the big winning opening 37. The actual number of rounds defined only for rounds including at least the opening is a hit pattern defined as 7R. The interval between rounds starts immediately after a specified number of game balls (1) are detected by the grand prize counter switch 370 in one round, and is a big prize until the first open state in the next round. This corresponds to a section in which the mouth 37 is closed. The interval between rounds may be started immediately after the special winning opening 37 is completely closed in one round. As shown in the figure, the interval pattern between rounds includes an interval pattern a in which the time for closing (closing time) is 0.3 s, an interval pattern b in which 1.65 s is set, and an interval pattern in which 2.31 s is set. c, an interval pattern d of 2.97 s is defined. In the winning pattern 1, all the intervals between rounds are interval pattern a, and the winning a prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 7R rounds, and the winning prize opening 37 is in the 8R to 16R rounds. It is defined to be an open / close pattern C. That is, the hit pattern 1 stipulates that the substantial rounds are 7 rounds from 1R to 7R, and the remaining 9 rounds from 8R to 16R are executed as non-essential rounds.

  The winning pattern 2 is a winning pattern that is generated when the extra bonus is added, and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 2, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1R to the start of the 7R is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 16R is the interval pattern d, and the 1R to 16R It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the extra bonus that is executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 2, the number of winning balls based only on the number of winning prizes (specified number of winnings: 1) is 240. However, if over winning is included, the expected number of winning balls is Therefore, the number (405) corresponding to these differences is reported as an additional number in the first half round (rounds 1R to 7R).

  The winning pattern 3 is a winning pattern that occurs when the medium addition bonus 1 is set and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 3, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1R to the start of the 7R is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 16R is the interval pattern c, and the 1R to 16R It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the medium addition bonus 1 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 3, the number of award balls based on the prescribed number of winnings is 240, but if the over winning is included, the scheduled number of winning balls is 510. The number to be performed (270) is reported as an additional number in the first half round.

  The winning pattern 4 is a winning pattern that is generated when the medium addition bonus 2 is set and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 4, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1R to the start of the 7R is the interval pattern a, the interval between rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 9R is the interval pattern b, and from the end of the 9R to the start of the 11R The interval between rounds is interval pattern c, the interval between rounds between the 11th and 12th rounds is interval pattern a, the interval between rounds from the end of the 12th R to the start of the 16th R is the interval pattern d, and the 1st to 16th Rs It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the middle addition bonus 2 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 4, the number (270) corresponding to the difference between the number of prize balls (240) and the planned number of prize balls (510) is the second half round (rounds after the 8th round). It is reported as an additional number.

  The winning pattern 5 is a winning pattern that is generated when the bonus 1 is added, and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 5, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 1R to the start of the 7R is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 16R is the interval pattern b, It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the small extra bonus 1 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 5, the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes is 240, but when including over prizes, the planned number of prize balls is 375. The number (135) to be reported is reported as an additional number in the first half round.

  The winning pattern 6 is a winning pattern that is generated when the bonus 2 is added and is specified with the specified round number and the actual round number being 16R. In the hit pattern 6, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1Rth to the start of the 13Rth is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 13Rth to the start of the 16th R is the interval pattern d, and the 1st to 16Rths It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the small extra bonus 2 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 6, the number (135) corresponding to the difference between the number of winning balls (240) and the planned number of winning balls (375) is reported as an additional number until the second half round. .

  The winning pattern 7 is a winning pattern that occurs when the bonus is not added, and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. The winning pattern 7 is defined so that the interval between all rounds from the end of the 1Rth to the start of the 16thR is the interval pattern a, and the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all the rounds of the 1R to 16R. Has been. In the extra bonus executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 7, there is no difference between the number of winning balls (240) and the planned number of winning balls (240) because over-winning is unlikely to occur, and the number of added balls is notified. Absent.

  The winning pattern 8 occurs in the small winning gaming state, and is defined so that the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C only once. That is, the winning pattern 8 is executed as a winning pattern in which the possibility of winning a game ball with respect to the big winning opening 37 becomes extremely low.

  The hit pattern may have the following contents. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the interval time between rounds is defined as the above-described interval patterns a to d on the assumption that the game ball is continuously fired. The interval time between rounds may be defined with reference to the starting point of the launch operation. For example, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls are continuously fired due to the start of the launch operation, for example, the second game ball can reach the winning prize opening shutter 37A from the start of the launch operation. The assumed maximum arrival time of the second wax is 3.99 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s). Similarly, the third assumed maximum arrival time is 4.65 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s), the fourth assumed maximum arrival time is 5.31 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s), 5 The assumed maximum arrival time of the individual is 5.97 s (3.33 s + 0.66 + 0.66 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s). Thereby, as interval pattern b, you may prescribe | regulate the time corresponding to such 2nd assumption maximum arrival time. That is, the interval patterns a to d may be other than the above-described times, but the interval pattern a is preferably a time less than the second assumed maximum arrival time, and the interval pattern b is the third assumed maximum. Preferably, the interval pattern c is less than the fourth assumed maximum arrival time, and the interval pattern d is less than the fifth assumed maximum arrival time. It is preferable to become. In this embodiment, the interval pattern d, which is the maximum time of the interval between rounds, is defined as a time in which 4 winnings per round (3 winnings over) can be realized, but 5 or more per round It may be a time for winning a prize. However, in the case where five or more winnings are possible, it is preferable that the longitudinal dimension of the large winning opening shutter 37A is a length that allows at least five game balls to pass simultaneously. In addition, the hit pattern 1 may be assigned with the same opening / closing pattern for all of the rounds, or may be different only in some rounds. Further, the hit pattern 1 may have a different interval pattern only in some intervals between rounds. The hit patterns 2 to 7 may have different opening / closing patterns in some or all rounds. In addition, the hit patterns 2 to 7 may have different interval patterns only in some intervals between rounds.

[Specifications of the big prize opening shutter]
Next, the specifications of the special winning opening shutter 37A will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 10, the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37A (large winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 is schematically shown as different from FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the special winning opening shutter 37A is movable in the front-rear direction of the game board 1 (not shown) (the direction indicated by the white arrow in the figure). For example, when the diameter d of the game ball is 11 mm, the long dimension L is about d × 8 + a (6 mm) = 94 mm. As a result, a maximum of eight game balls can be simultaneously passed through the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state. However, in the present embodiment, when one game ball is launched in response to the start of the launch operation, the firing interval from when one next game ball is launched or one game ball is launched. 10B, considering the arrival time until the game ball is positioned at the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A (the upper region of the right end portion of the closed big winning opening shutter 37A). In addition, a maximum of four game balls can be passed at the same time. Note that the time until the game ball that has reached the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A is detected by the big prize opening count switch 370 (the time until the interval between rounds starts) is about 0.1 s. The time required for the special winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A to move from one position to the other position of the closed position and the open position is about 0.01 s. It is.

  That is, in this embodiment, the launching device 26 has a firing rate of 90.90 per minute and a firing interval of 0.66 seconds. Further, the game ball passes through the first guide rail 30 and the second guide rail 30 ′ from a launch preparation position (not shown) to reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37 </ b> A as approximately 3.00-3. It takes 33 seconds. As a result, in a state in which the player continues to make a right strike, after the first game ball reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A, the next game ball wins a big prize approximately 0.33 to 0.99 seconds later. It reaches the right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A. In addition, the prize winning opening shutter 37A has a longitudinal dimension L of 94 mm, and a maximum of eight gaming balls with a diameter d = 11 mm can be passed in a row at the same time. Since it has an inclined surface that advances by 11 mm in 33 seconds, that is, advances by 22 mm every 0.66 seconds, a maximum of four game balls can substantially pass at the same time. The inter-round interval is started when a winning of one game ball is detected during the round game, and is started immediately before the big winning port shutter 37A completely closes the big winning port 37. Also, regarding the time from when the game winning ball shutter 37A is opened immediately after the game ball reaches the right end portion of the game winning port shutter 37A until the game ball winning is detected by the game winning port count switch 370. 0.1 seconds is required. Furthermore, it is assumed that 0.01 second is required for one opening / closing operation in which the special prize opening shutter 37A moves from the closed position to the open position or from the open position to the closed position.

  In the present embodiment, by assuming the various times as described above, in the state where the right hit is continuously performed in the big hit gaming state, the interval time between the rounds after the end of the 1R round is an interval. If the pattern d is 2.97 s, four winnings including three over winnings per round are possible. With respect to the time of such an interval pattern d, for example, after the game ball that is detected for winning in the first round reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A, the next game ball will take the big prize opening after 0.99 seconds at the maximum. From reaching the right end portion of the shutter 37A, the time that four game balls including this game ball will be positioned on the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37A is approximately 0.99 s + 0.66 s × 3 ( ) = 2.97 s. In addition, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the first round is 2.31s of the interval pattern c, three winnings including two over winnings per round are possible. This can be assumed as a state where the number of over-wins is reduced from two over-wins. Thereby, with respect to the time of the interval pattern c, 2.97 s of the interval pattern d corresponding to the above-mentioned three over winnings with respect to the time when three game balls will be positioned on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A. This is considered to be obtained by subtracting one passage time from 2.97 s-0.66 s = 2.31 s. Similarly, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the first round is 1.65 s of the interval pattern b, two winnings including one over winning per round are possible. This can be assumed as a state in which two over winnings are reduced to one over winning. Thereby, for the time of the interval pattern b, 2.31 s of the interval pattern c corresponding to the two over winnings described above for the time when two game balls will be positioned on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A. It is considered that the passing time for one piece is subtracted from 2.31s−0.66s = 1.65s. Furthermore, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the first round is 0.3 s of the interval pattern a, there is no over winning per round and only one winning is possible. With respect to the time of such an interval pattern a, for example, after the game ball that is detected for winning in the first round reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A, the next gaming ball will be the big prize opening after 0.33 seconds at the shortest. In order to reach the right end portion of the shutter 37A, it is proved that the next game ball is opened before reaching the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A in 0.3s shorter than 0.33 seconds. The

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. The table defines lottery value (random value) information for determining predetermined items based on lottery values (random numbers) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range. Value information is synonymous with a so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, the “random number value” may be simply referred to as “random number”. 11 and 13 show the selection rate (%) corresponding to the lottery rate.

[Additional pattern selection table]
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an additional pattern selection table. This additional pattern selection table is a table that is referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The extra pattern selection table is a table for selecting an extra pattern as a hit effect pattern to be described later according to the hit patterns 2 to 7. The additional pattern selection table is provided for each of the hit patterns 2 to 7 and defines various additional patterns that are items to be determined and the selection rate (%) when selecting the additional pattern by lottery.

  According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 2) associated with the hit pattern 2, the extra patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the extra bonus. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 3) associated with the hit pattern 3, the middle add-on patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the middle extra bonus 1. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 4) associated with the hit pattern 4, the middle add-on patterns 5 to 8 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the middle extra bonus 2. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 5) associated with the hit pattern 5, the small extra patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the small extra bonus 1. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 6) associated with the hit pattern 6, the small extra patterns 5 to 8 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the small extra bonus 2. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 7) associated with the hit pattern 7, the no-addition pattern 1 is selected at a predetermined selection rate (100% in this embodiment) as the extra pattern corresponding to the no extra bonus. Is done.

  It should be noted that the selection rate for allocating an additional pattern that is a decision item in the additional pattern selection table is not limited to that shown in FIG. Each of the additional pattern selection tables other than the additional pattern selection table (success pattern 7) defines four additional patterns. However, the additional pattern selection table may define three or less additional patterns, or each additional pattern selection table. The number of patterns defined for each may be different. Also in the additional pattern selection table (pattern 7), a plurality of additional patterns may be defined.

[Additional pattern table]
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an addition pattern table. This additional pattern table is a table that is referred to in the effect processing during the round (see FIG. 37) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The extra pattern table is a table for defining the extra number for the effect and the round for performing the notification according to the extra pattern. The additional pattern table is provided for each type of bonus, and defines an additional pattern and round number as reference items and an additional number as a decision item. In addition, the number of additions is notified together with the appearance of an additional character described later.

  According to the extra pattern table (large extra bonus) corresponding to the extra extra bonus, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each extra extra pattern 1 to 4 as an extra pattern. For example, in the large addition pattern 1, “30” is notified as the addition number to the 2R, “105” is notified as the addition number to the 4R, and “270” is notified as the addition number to the 7R. The total number added up is “405”.

  According to the extra pattern table (medium extra bonus 1) corresponding to the middle extra bonus 1, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each of the intermediate extra patterns 1 to 4 as the extra pattern. For example, in the middle addition pattern 1, “30” is notified as the addition number in the 2R, “105” is notified as the addition number in the 4R, and “135” is notified as the addition number in the 7R. The total number added is “270”.

  According to the extra pattern table (medium extra bonus 2) corresponding to the middle extra bonus 2, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each of the intermediate extra patterns 5 to 8 as the extra pattern. For example, in the middle addition pattern 5, “135” is notified as the addition number at 8R, and “135” is notified as the addition number at 9R. The total number added is “270”.

  According to the additional pattern table (small additional bonus 1) corresponding to the small additional bonus 1, the number of rounds and the notified additional number are defined for each of the small additional patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the small addition pattern 1, “30” is notified as the addition number to the 2R, and “105” is notified as the addition number to the 4R. The total number of these added is “135”.

  According to the additional pattern table (small additional bonus 2) corresponding to the small additional bonus 2, the number of rounds and the notified additional number are defined for each of the small additional patterns 5 to 8 as the additional pattern. For example, in the small addition pattern 5, “135” is reported as the addition number only to the 8th R.

  According to the extra pattern table (no extra bonus) corresponding to the no extra bonus, the number of rounds corresponding to the no extra pattern 1 as the extra pattern and the reported extra number are defined. For example, in the no-addition pattern 1, the number of additions is not notified in any round.

  Note that the numerical value for distributing the additional number in the additional pattern table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12, but the additional number (405, 270, 135) obtained from the difference between the number of prize balls and the expected number of prize balls is appropriately distributed. You can do it. In addition, after a numerical value exceeding the total added number is notified as an additional number, a numerical value to be notified may be set so as to be subtracted, so that the predetermined total additional number may be finally obtained. . In addition, for example, “210” may be defined as an initial value, and an additional number may be notified in any round.

[Additional character lottery table]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an additional character lottery table. The added character lottery table is a table that is referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The extra character lottery table is a table for selecting, by lottery, an extra character that appears at the start of the extra bonus or informing the extra number according to the extra pattern. The added character lottery table defines various added patterns as reference items, added characters as determined items, and a selection rate (%) when selecting an added character by lottery. As an additional character, “animal”, “female”, and “fireworker” are defined.

  For example, in the large addition patterns 1 to 4, the selection rate of the “female” addition character is generally higher than that of the “animal” addition character, and the selection rate of the “fireworker” addition character is higher than that of the “female” addition character. Is specified to be high. In the intermediate addition patterns 1 to 8, the selection rate of the additional characters “female” and “fireworks” is generally higher than the additional characters “animal”. The small addition patterns 1 to 8 are generally defined such that the selection rate of the “animal” additional character is higher than that of the “female” or “fireworker” additional character. In the no-addition pattern 1, it is defined that the selection rate of the additional character “animal” is the highest. According to the added character appearing based on such an added character lottery table, the type of bonus is suggested, and the degree of expectation for the prize ball is also increased from the added number that is notified simultaneously with the appearance of the added character. be able to.

  Note that the selection rate for allocating additional characters in the additional character lottery table is not limited to that shown in FIG. For various added characters, additional patterns that cannot be selected may be defined. For example, it is assumed that the “animal” additional character cannot be selected only in the large additional pattern, the “female” additional character cannot be selected only in the no additional pattern, and the “fireworks” additional character is Alternatively, the selection rate may be defined so that only the medium addition pattern or the large addition pattern can be selected.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing by main CPU]
14 and 15 are flowcharts showing main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 14, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs a watchdog timer disable setting process. If this process ends, the process moves to S11.

  In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  In S <b> 12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the power interruption detection state is present. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power interruption detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is set, and the process proceeds to S12. If the power interruption detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is not set, and the process proceeds to S13. Move.

  In S13, the main CPU 61 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 70 receives a signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S14.

  In S <b> 14, the main CPU 61 performs processing for permitting writing to the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  In S15, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, it moves the process to S30 (see FIG. 15), and if it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, it proceeds to S16. Move processing.

  In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power interruption detection flag. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a power interruption detection flag, it moves the process to S17, and if it determines that there is no power interruption detection flag, it moves the process to S30 (see FIG. 15). .

  In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a process of checking the work area for damage and calculating a work damage check value. If this process ends, the process moves to S18.

  In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S19, and if it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value, moves the process to S30. .

  In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S20.

  In S20, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. If this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  In S21, the main CPU 61 performs a probability change state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 61 performs a display to notify that the winning probability of the big hit is a high probability state in the case of the probability variation gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S22. Note that the notification display may be configured to end at the start or end of the first fluctuation after power-on.

  In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption to the sub-control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to S24, where the address before power interruption, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area is restored.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 8000H to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  In S32, the main CPU 61 performs all work area clear processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S <b> 34, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process for the work area when the RAM is initialized. If this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  In S <b> 35, the main CPU 61 performs processing for transmitting a command at initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub-control circuit 70. In the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. If this process ends, the process moves to S36.

  In S <b> 36, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In S37, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for prohibiting the interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  In S38, the main CPU 61 performs initial value random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for permitting an interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the rendering condition selection random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63. If the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S42, and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If not, the process proceeds to S37.

  In S <b> 42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  In S43, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 measures the waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and the opening time of the big winning opening 37 that is opened when a big hit or a small hit occurs. Large winning opening opening time timer, a security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when it is detected that an illegal act has occurred. The process of updating various timers is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. Although described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 61 extracts a winning determination random number value and a winning symbol determination random number value in accordance with detection signals from the first starting winning port switch 320 and the second starting winning port switch 330 and stores them in the main ROM 62. With reference to a big hit determination table (not shown), it is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery (big lot and small lottery lottery) has been won, and the result of determination is stored in the main RAM 63. The special symbol control process in S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  In S45, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the normal symbol determination random number value and the normal symbol determination random number value in accordance with the detection signal from the pass gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random number value and the main ROM 62. It is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won based on the normal symbol winning table (not shown), and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determining random number value, and the normal symbol determining table stored in the main ROM 62 are determined. Based on (not shown), it is determined which of the lost symbol and the winning symbol is used, and the result of the determination is stored. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, and if not winning, the determination result indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, the blade member 34 opens, for example, 3 times in 1.3 seconds, or 4 times in 1.4 seconds, or 6 times in 1.8 seconds. . That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the wing member 34 is opened, and when the wing member 34 is in the open state, the game ball can easily win the second starting port 33. If this process ends, the process moves to S46.

  In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sends a control signal for driving the LED unit 5 to the main RAM 63 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the normal symbol control process. The process to memorize is performed. The main CPU 61 transmits a control signal to the LED unit 5. The LED unit 5 variably displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and stops based on the received control signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S47.

  In S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing for generating data related to game information signals to be transmitted to the base computer or the hall computer 100 and storing the data in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S48.

  In S48, the main CPU 61 performs symbol reservation number data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 detects the first start port switch 320 and the second switch detected by the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S71, S72 in FIG. 17) in the timer interrupt process described later. Based on the detection signal from the start port switch 330 and the passing gate switch 350, and the update result of the number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 63 updated in accordance with the execution of the change display of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the first A process for storing in the main RAM 63 a control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S49.

  In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above-described steps. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 and opens / closes the LED power source (common signal) for turning on the LED, the special prize opening shutter 37A, and the blade member 34. Supply solenoid power for driving the solenoid that opens and closes. If this process ends, the process moves to S50.

  In S50, the main CPU 61 performs a winning mouth related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for controlling a winning opening related command. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by main CPU 61]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps. Even when the main CPU 61 is executing the main process, the main CPU 61 may interrupt the main process and execute the timer interrupt process. This timer interrupt process is a process performed in accordance with a clock pulse generated every predetermined period (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register saving process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. If this process ends, the process moves to S61.

  In S61, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of incrementing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by one. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) on the condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). If this process ends, the process moves to S62.

  In S62, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the main CPU 61 starts from the initial reset circuit 64. A system reset signal is output. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters a system reset state. If this process ends, the process moves to S63.

  In S63, the main CPU 61 performs a random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a winning determination random number counter, a winning symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. The hit determination random number counter and the hit symbol determination random number counter are not fair if the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, a fixed timing every 2 ms is required to ensure this. I am trying to update with. If this process ends, the process moves to S64.

  In S64, the main CPU 61 performs switch input processing. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each passing area has detected a winning. For example, when the main CPU 61 detects a winning, the main CPU 61 sets “1 (ON)” to the bit corresponding to the passing area determined to have won. The switch input process in S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S65.

  In S65, the main CPU 61 performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40. The payout request command corresponding to is sent to the payout / firing control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out a prize ball corresponding to a passing area whose bit is “1 (ON)” in accordance with the winning of a game ball from the payout device 83. Is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. Further, when this command is set, the bit corresponding to the passing area that is the trigger of the command setting is controlled to “0 (OFF)”. If this process ends, the process moves to S66.

  In S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. If this process ends, the process moves to S67.

  In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register return process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process is finished, this timer interrupt process routine is finished.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing switch input processing executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 17, in S70, the main CPU 61 performs fraud detection switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor that can detect radio waves (not shown), a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetism, a vibration sensor that can detect vibration, and the like. If this process ends, the process moves to S71. If any of the sensors described above is in the detected state, an error notification may be given, and even if, for example, a big prize opening count switch detects a winning of a game ball, the winning is invalidated. You may make it do.

  In S71, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol related switch check process. This special symbol related switch check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S72.

  In S72, the main CPU 61 performs a normal symbol related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input from the passing gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected. 4), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit, this process is terminated. If it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, the hit determination random number value is extracted from the hit determination random number counter of the normal symbol game, the hit determination random number value is further extracted from the hit symbol determination random number counter, and the normal RAM 63 normal Processing to store in the symbol storage area is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S73.

  In S73, the main CPU 61 performs prize ball related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input from the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first starting winning opening switch 320, and the second starting winning opening switch 330. When it is determined that the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter is performed, and the first start winning opening switch 320 or the second When it is determined that there is an input from the start winning prize switch 330, a process of adding 1 to the value of the corresponding start opening winning counter is performed. When this process is finished, this switch input process routine is finished.

[Special design related switch check processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a special symbol related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol related switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 18, in S80, the main CPU 61 performs a first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S81.

  In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S82.

  In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the special symbol related switch check processing routine is finished.

[First start switch check processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The first start port switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 19, in S90, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a winning of a game ball to the first start port 32 is detected based on a detection signal from the first start port switch 320. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start port switch 320 is “1 (ON)”, and the first start port If the bit of the winning detection counter is “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S91, and if the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter is not “1 (ON)”, the first starting port The switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S91, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the first start-up switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S92.

  In S92, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserved first symbol symbols stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S93.

  In S93, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. Then, the rendering condition determination random value is extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). The determination results based on the hit determination random numbers are derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and are obtained by winning the game ball at the first starting port 32 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. If this process ends, the process moves to S94.

  In S94, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S95.

  In S95, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to win a prize based on a random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S96.

  In S <b> 96, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command includes information indicating a winning determination random number and information indicating a winning symbol determining random number. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that a game ball has been won and the winning lottery result is determined. It becomes like this. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing an effect such as changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed in the effect display when it is determined that the winning effect is determined in the process of S95. As a result, a so-called “prefetching effect” in which an effect is executed based on the start-up memory before the execution of variation is possible. When this process is finished, the first start port switch check process routine is finished.

[Second start-up switch check process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The second start port switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 20, in S <b> 100, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning of a game ball to the second start port 33 is detected based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 330. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second start port switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and the second start port If the bit of the winning detection counter is “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S101, and if the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter is not “1 (ON)”, the second starting port The switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the second start port switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S102.

  In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserves of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S103.

  In S103, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. The random number value for effect condition determination is extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). The determination result based on the hit determination random number is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and the various kinds obtained by winning the game ball at the second starting port 33 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. If this process ends, the process moves to S104.

  In S104, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S105.

  In S105, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to win a prize based on a random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S106.

  In S <b> 106, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process is finished, the second start port switch check process routine is finished.

[Big prize opening switch check processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special winning opening switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 21, in S <b> 110, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning of a game ball to the big prize opening 37 is detected based on a detection signal from the big prize opening count switch 370. . In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 37 is detected, the main CPU 61 moves to S111 and determines that the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 37 is not detected. In this case, the special winning opening switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the big prize winning prize counter. The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the number of winning game balls detected in one round has reached a predetermined winning number. If this process ends, the process moves to S112.

  In S <b> 112, the main CPU 61 sets a big prize opening prize command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The big prize opening prize command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening 37. Become. On the condition that such a large winning opening winning command is received, the sub-control circuit 70 adds, for example, the number of extras displayed during the extra bonus to the expected number of winning balls described later. When this process is finished, the special winning opening switch check processing routine is finished.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in units of the following steps. In FIG. 22, the numerical values shown at the sides of S <b> 121 to S <b> 128 indicate control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the control state flag storage area in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63. As a result, the special symbol game proceeds.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the first S120, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S121.

  In S121 to S128, which will be described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and allows one of the processes in S121 to S128 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 61 executes processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined in accordance with a waiting time timer set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes a timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle.

  In S121, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol memory check process. Details of S121 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S122.

  In S122, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation time management process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, and when the variation time has elapsed, sets the value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management to the control state flag. Set the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) in the waiting time timer. That is, after the waiting time after determination elapses, the process of S123 is set to be executed. Details of S122 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S123.

  In S123, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management and the waiting time after determination has elapsed. In the case of big hit or small hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. In other words, after the time corresponding to the hit start interval elapses, the process of S124 is set to be executed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit or a small hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S128. Details of S123 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S124.

  In S124, the main CPU 61 executes a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the main winning a prize mouth shutter read from the main ROM 62. Data for opening 37A is stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 in FIG. 15, the main CPU 61 reads out data for opening the big prize opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63, and outputs a signal for opening the big prize opening shutter 37A. It is supplied to the big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A. As a result, the main CPU 61 performs opening / closing control of the special winning opening 37. In other words, a winning game state is executed in which a predetermined advantageous game (a round game in which the special winning opening 37 changes into an open state in which the game ball 37 can easily receive a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to receive through an interval period) is repeated a predetermined number of times. Become. In this case, a small hit gaming state in which the special winning opening 37 is short-opened only once may be executed.

  Further, the main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open to the control state flag, and sets the upper opening limit time (for example, 10s of the opening / closing pattern A per round) to the special winning opening open time timer. set. That is, it sets so that the process of S126 may be performed. Details of S124 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S165.

  In S125, the main CPU 61 executes a waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the big winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds (interval patterns a to d) has elapsed. The grand prize opening number counter is stored and updated so as to increase by “1”. The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 10s of the opening / closing pattern A per round) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, it sets so that the process of S126 may be performed. Details of S125 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S126.

  In S126, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control status flag is a value (04H) indicating that the big prize opening is being opened, the main CPU 61 has passed the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is “1” or more, and the opening upper limit time ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the big prize opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the special winning opening 37 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not a condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening open number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets a value indicating the hit end interval (06H) in the control state flag in the case of the final round, and a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management before re-opening of the big winning opening if it is not the final round. Is set in the control status flag. Details of S126 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S127.

  In S127, the main CPU 61 executes a hit end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game to the control state when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S128. Details of S127 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S128.

  In S128, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game end process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S121. Details of S128 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the special symbol control process routine is finished.

  As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flags to (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is lost. ), (07H) in order, the processing of S121, S122, S123, and S128 shown in FIG. 22 is executed at a predetermined timing. When the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flag to (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is a big hit or small hit. ) In order, the processing of S121, S122, and S123 shown in FIG. 22 is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in order of (03H), (04H), (05H), and the process shown in FIG. The processes of S124, S126, and S125 shown are executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. When the end condition of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is satisfied, the processing of S125, S127 to S128 shown in FIG. 21 is performed by setting (04H), (06H), (07H) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol memory check process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, it moves the process to S131. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol storage check processing routine.

  In S131, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining the presence or absence of the start memory. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that there is no special symbol game start memory, that is, the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) or the second special symbol start memory. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S132. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start-up memory, it moves the process to S133.

  In S132, the main CPU 61 performs a demo display process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 63. Furthermore, the state in which the special symbol game start memory (the first special symbol start memory area or the second special symbol start memory area in which the random number for hit determination is stored) is “0” for a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) If it is maintained, a value that permits execution of the demonstration display is set as the demonstration display permission value. Then, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demonstration display command stored in this way is supplied as a demonstration display command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Thereby, the demonstration display is executed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is finished, the special symbol memory check process routine is finished.

  In S133, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol start storage area is “0”. That is, if it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S134. When it is determined that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not “0”, that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), S135 Move processing to.

  In S <b> 134, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating the variation of the second special symbol as a variation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S136.

  In S <b> 135, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01 </ b> H) indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S136.

  In S136, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S137.

  In S137, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol memory transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 converts each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) to the first special symbol. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3), and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area A process of shifting (storing) each of the data in (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. To do. If this process ends, the process moves to S138.

  In S138, the main CPU 61 executes a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) that are jackpots differs depending on whether or not the game state flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Select a judgment table. That is, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the high probability jackpot determination table having a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the gaming state flag is not a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value The jackpot determination table for the non-probability changing gaming state with a small number is referred. As described above, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability-changing gaming state, that is, when the gaming state is a probability-changing gaming state as a special gaming state that easily shifts to the specific gaming state (big-hit gaming state), the jackpot gaming state is set. The probability of transition will be higher than the non-probable variable gaming state as a non-special gaming state that is less likely to transition to the specific gaming state than the probability-changing gaming state as the special gaming state.

  The special gaming state is a probability change / short time gaming state, and the non-special gaming state is basically a non-probability variation / non-time saving gaming state, but the special gaming state is at least one of a probability variation gaming state and a time saving gaming state. It may be in one game state. The non-special game state may include a case where the non-probability game state and the short-time game state are entered.

  Then, the main CPU 61 is used for determining whether or not the special symbol start storage area is extracted in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). The random number value and the selected jackpot determination table are referred to. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to enter a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Thus, in the process of S138, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. If this process ends, the process moves to S139.

  In S139, the main CPU 61 executes the small hit determination process when it is determined that the big hit is not won in the big hit determination process of S138. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a small hit determination table that defines a determination value (small hit determination value) that is a small hit regardless of the gaming state flag.

  The main CPU 61 extracts a random number for determining the hit of the special symbol start storage area extracted in the winning of the game ball and set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). And the selected small hit determination table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit when the hit determination random number value matches the small hit determination value.

  Since the small hit can occur in either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hit determination disturbance stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area. The small hit determination process is performed based on the numerical value, but the small hit determination process may be performed based only on the random number value for the hit determination stored in one of the special symbol start storage areas.

  As described above, in the process of S139, either the small hit or the loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and the special symbol is determined when both the big hit determination process of S138 and the small hit determination process of S139 are not won. Loss is determined as a game determination result. If this process ends, the process moves to S140.

  In S140, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines the big hit symbol when the big hit determination result is a big hit win, and determines the small hit symbol when the small hit determination result is a big hit win, for either the big hit or the small hit. If it is lost, a process of determining a lost symbol is performed. Details of S140 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S141.

  In S141, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 differs based on the special symbol determined in the process of S140, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processes of S138 and S139, and the value of the probability variation counter. A variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern is selected. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the rendering condition determination random value extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, the ST game state and the normal game state have different variation pattern determination tables. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. This process is the same in the ST gaming state.

  The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a variation pattern designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes an effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. If this process ends, the process moves to S142.

  In S142, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol variation time setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for the current variation display. If this process ends, the process moves to S143.

  In S143, the main CPU 61 executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variable display. When this process is finished, the special symbol memory check process routine is finished.

[Special symbol determination processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in S150, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S151. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S156.

  In S151, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the jackpot variation state number determined in S150 is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S152 if the change state number is a value (01H) indicating that the change is the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the variation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the variation state number is the variation of the first special symbol, that is, the main CPU 61 is the value (02H) indicating that the variation state number is the variation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process proceeds to S154.

  In S152, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random number value for determining the hit symbol. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines the first special symbol jackpot symbol (shown in the first special symbol jackpot symbol allocation in FIG. 7) based on the winning symbol determination random number value extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the jackpot determination table. A process for determining whether the symbol corresponds to probability variation 1) is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S153.

  In S153, the main CPU 61 performs a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the determined first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big special symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  In S154, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (shown in the second special symbol jackpot symbol distribution in FIG. 7) based on the random symbol value for determining the jackpot symbol extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the jackpot determination table. A process of determining which of the probability variation 1 to the probability variation 6 is a symbol) is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S155.

  In S155, the main CPU 61 performs a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the determined second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  In S156, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the result determined in the small hit determination process (S139 in FIG. 23) is a win in the small hit. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S157 when the small win is won. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S161 when it is not the small win.

  In S157, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the small bonus symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (the first bonus symbol in FIG. 7) based on the random symbol value for winning symbol determination extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the small hit determination table. A process for determining whether or not the second special symbol small hit symbol allocation) is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S158.

  In S158, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the small hit symbol and a command set of the small hit symbol of the determined first special symbol or second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the small hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol based on the data of the big hit symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command for the small special symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. . Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the small hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  In S159, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S160.

  In S160, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening opening number related data set process. In this process, the main CPU 61 displays the data related to the number of times of opening of the big prize opening 37 regarding the number of times of opening of the big prize opening 37, that is, the probability change 1 according to the first special symbol or the probability variation 1 to the probability variation 6 according to the second special symbol, Processing for setting the corresponding data in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process is finished, the special symbol determination process routine is finished.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines in S161 that it is neither big hit in S150 nor small hit in S156, that is, it is lost, it performs a lost symbol data set and a lost symbol command set. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol in a mode based on the lost symbol data. Also, the main CPU 61 sets a lost symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the manner of disabling display. When this process is finished, the special symbol determination process routine is finished.

[Special symbol change time management processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value indicating special symbol variation time management (value set in the special symbol storage check process: 01H). If the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) indicates special symbol variation time management, the process proceeds to S171. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

  In S171, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer set in the special symbol storage check process is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S172. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the special symbol variation time management processing routine is terminated.

  In S172, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and moves the processing to S173. At this time, the main CPU 61 recognizes the symbol stop by the symbol display device control process, and derives the display result with the symbol determined by the special symbol determination process.

  In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. The symbol stop command is supplied as a symbol stop command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S174.

  In S <b> 174, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a post-confirmation waiting time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. In the present embodiment, if the symbol to be stopped and displayed is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, for example, 1002 ms is set as the waiting time after decision, and if it is a lost symbol, for example, 540 ms is set as the waiting time after decision. . It should be noted that the same waiting time after determination may be used for both the winning symbol and the lost symbol, or the waiting time after fixing may be longer for the winning symbol than for the winning symbol. When this process is finished, the special symbol variation time management process routine is finished.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol display time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in S180, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating a special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S181. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

  In S181, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S182. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

  In S182, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that the game is a big hit, it moves the process to S183. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S184.

  In S183, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S190.

  In S184, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol variation frequency) in the probability variation gaming state. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S189. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S185.

  In S185, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S186.

  In S186, the main CPU 61 determines again whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S187. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S189.

  In S187, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a probability variation end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a probability change end command indicating the end of the probability change gaming state in the main RAM 63. Then, the probability change end command is supplied as a command indicating the game state from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the probability change game state. Become. If this process ends, the process moves to S188.

  In S188, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S189.

  In S189, the main CPU 61 performs a process for determining whether or not a small hit is made. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it moves the process to S190. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to S194.

  In S190, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S191. In the present embodiment, the hit start interval time corresponding to the case where the second special symbol is a jackpot symbol of “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” is the right end of the big winning opening shutter 37A after the game ball is fired. It is shorter than 3000 ms, which is the shortest time to reach the portion, for example, 2500 ms.

  In S191, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 starts the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating a specific hit pattern as well as the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Based on the data indicating the winning pattern included in the winning start display command, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern such as an extra pattern in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S192.

  In S192, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the special winning opening opening number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S193.

  In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

  In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the end process of the special symbol game as the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

[Period start interval management processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit start interval management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in S200, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the hit start interval management process (03H), the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

  In S201, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S202. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

  In S202, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S203. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S205.

  In S203, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the special winning opening opening number counter upper limit value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and moves the process to S204.

  In S204, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the special winning opening opening number counter, and moves the process to S205.

  In S <b> 205, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening / closing pattern corresponding to the type of the big win symbol or the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the winning pattern (big winning opening / closing pattern) shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the big winning symbol or the small winning symbol determined in S205. If this process ends, the process moves to S206.

  In S <b> 206, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command during the opening of the special winning opening becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S207.

  In S <b> 207, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S208.

  In S <b> 208, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S209.

  In S <b> 209, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set as 10 s when the time corresponding to the value (number of rounds) of the special winning opening opening number counter (for example, if the big win symbol of the first special symbol is “probability 1”). If this process ends, the process moves to S210.

  In S <b> 210, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the special winning opening 37. The variables stored in this way drive the special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the special winning opening 37. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends. In the present embodiment, data corresponding to any of the open / close patterns A to C is set as the special winning opening open data.

[Question management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the waiting time question management process before reopening of the big prize opening executed by the main CPU 61. The waiting time question management process before reopening of the big prize opening is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening, the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management process routine before the big winning opening reopening.

  In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time question management processing routine before reopening the big winning opening.

  In S <b> 222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S223.

  In step S <b> 223, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command during the opening of the special winning opening becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special winning opening open display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S224.

  In S224, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S225.

  In S <b> 225, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S226.

  In S <b> 226, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S227.

  In S <b> 227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the waiting time question management process routine before reopening the big prize opening is finished. In this process as well, data corresponding to any of the open / close patterns A to C is set as the special winning opening open data.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. This process during opening of the special prize opening is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in S230, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the big prize opening, the process proceeds to S231. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the process for opening the big prize opening, the main routine for opening the special prize opening is ended.

  In S231, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the big prize winning prize counter is “1” or more. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is “1” or more, it moves the process to S234. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is not “1” or more, it moves the process to S232.

  In S232, the main CPU 61 executes a big winning opening / closing process corresponding to the set opening / closing pattern for each round in the type of big hit and the current round, and moves the process to S233. In S232, a big prize opening / closing process corresponding to the opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit is also executed.

  In S233, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the big winning opening opening time is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S234. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine for opening the special winning opening.

  In S234, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the big prize opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the special winning opening. The variables stored in this way are for closing the prize winning shutter solenoid 370A. If this process ends, the process moves to S235.

  In S235, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not a small hit is made. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it moves the process to S240. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to S236.

  In S236, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the upper limit of the number of large winning opening (number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the large winning opening number (rounds), and the value of the large winning opening number counter It is determined whether or not is equal to or greater than the upper limit value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of times that the special winning opening is opened is 16 (16R). If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the winning opening opening number, the process proceeds to S240. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 does not determine that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the special winning opening number, the process proceeds to S237.

  In S237, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. In addition, the time corresponding to interval pattern ad is set to the interval display time between rounds. If this process ends, the process moves to S238.

  In S238, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S239.

  In S <b> 239, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is finished, the special winning opening opening process routine is finished.

  On the other hand, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S241.

  In S241, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63 in the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S242.

  In S <b> 242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The winning end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When this process is finished, the special winning opening opening process routine is finished.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in S250, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S251. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the hit end interval management process (06H), the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management process routine.

  In S251, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, it moves the process to S252. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management processing routine.

  In S252, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 in the special symbol control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S253.

  In S253, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the type of the winning game state that has been completed is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S254. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S256.

  In S 254, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “01H” in the game state flag of the main RAM 63. The game state flag “01H” indicates a probability variation gaming state and a short-time gaming state. Note that the game state flag “00H” indicates the non-probability changing game state and the non-time-saving game state. If this process ends, the process moves to S255.

  In S <b> 255, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “10” as the ST count in the value of the probability variation counter in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the hit end interval management process routine ends.

  In S256, the main CPU 61 sets a gaming state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The gaming state command is a command including information indicating the type of winning gaming state (big hit, small hit) that has been completed in addition to information indicating a gaming state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state. Such a gaming state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the process proceeds to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the special symbol game end process routine is ended.

  In S261, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the special symbol game end process routine ends.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processes such as a display control process.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This main process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in S270, the sub CPU 71 performs initialization processing in response to power-on. If this process ends, the process moves to S271.

  In step S <b> 271, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for updating the random number values (such as the effect determination random number counter value and the stop symbol determination random number counter value) stored in the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S272.

  In S272, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. Although details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S273. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S273, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for display in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. A display control circuit 76 including a VDP (Video Display Processor) receives various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and rendering image data based on data for displaying the rendering image from the sub CPU 71. The data is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S274.

  In S274, the sub CPU 71 performs a sound control process for controlling sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c via the sound control circuit 77. If this process ends, the process moves to S275.

  In step S <b> 275, the sub CPU 71 executes lamp control processing for controlling light emission (lighting / flashing) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. If this process ends, the process moves to S276.

  In S <b> 276, the sub CPU 71 performs a movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process is finished, the process moves to S271, and thereafter, the processes of S271 to S276 are repeated.

  On the other hand, even if the sub CPU 71 is executing the main process, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute a command reception interrupt process or a timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 33 and the timer interrupt process with reference to FIG.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in S280, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S281.

  In S281, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S282.

  In S282, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the program saved in S280 to each register. When this process is finished, the command reception interrupt process routine is finished.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in S290, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S291.

  In S291, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processes. If this process ends, the process moves to S292.

  In step S292, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for detecting whether or not the pressing operation button 9A is operated. This process is actually a determination process, but since it is an interrupt process, it will be described here as one routine. If this process ends, the process moves to S293.

  In S293, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the program saved in S290 to each register. When this process is finished, the timer interrupt process routine is finished.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in S300, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has been received, the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has not been received, the command analysis processing routine ends.

  In step S301, the sub CPU 71 reads the received command data, and performs processing according to the command data in subsequent steps. When the sub CPU 71 finishes reading the received command data, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S302.

  In S302, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S303. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S304.

  In S303, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern including a decorative symbol variation display mode based on the received variation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73 when the decorative symbol variation display mode is determined. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S304, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designation command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a symbol designation command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S305. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S306.

  In S305, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decorative design is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decorative design data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  The decorative symbols displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers “1” to “7”, and these decorative symbols (numbers) have a predetermined number (for example, three (three digits). )) Is basically a big hit game state when the same decorative symbols (numbers) are arranged. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is “probability variation 1”, for example, with a predetermined probability (for example, the probability of 1/10 when the second special symbol is “probability variation 1”), The decorative design is a uniform line of numbers “3” or “7”. In addition, the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol “probability 1” of the first special symbol is a uniform line of the numbers “1”, “2”, “4” to “6”, and the jackpot symbol “2” of the second special symbol “ The decorative symbols corresponding to “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” are numbers “1”, “2”, and “4” to “6”. In addition, the decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol has a specific appearance that is, for example, the number “135” as a combination of specific symbols, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the loss is a non-specific random symbol. Note that the correspondence between the jackpot symbol and the decorative symbol is a uniquely determined relationship, for example, the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol “probable variation 1” is a uniform “3” or “7”, and the jackpot symbol “probable variation”. The decorative symbols corresponding to “2” to “probability 6” may be aligned with “1”, “2”, and “4” to “6”. Also, for example, in the case of “Large bonus”, the decorative symbol is “3” or “7”, and in the case of “Middle bonus”, the decorative symbol is “1” or “5”. In the case of “Small extra bonus” and “No extra bonus”, the decorative symbol is “2”, “4”, or “6”, and the decorative symbol is stopped for each type of jackpot May be defined uniquely.

  In S306, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol stop command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a symbol stop command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S307. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S308.

  In step S <b> 307, the sub CPU 71 performs a decoration symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is variably displayed. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S308, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit start display command is received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit start display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S309. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S310.

  In S309, the sub CPU 71 executes a winning effect pattern determination process. This winning effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S310, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special winning opening open display command is received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the display command for opening the big prize opening as the read command, it moves the process to S311. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the display command for opening the big prize opening as the read command, it moves the process to S312.

  In S311, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during the round. This in-round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S312, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit end display command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit end display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S313. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S314.

  In S313, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. This winning end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S314, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

[Performance pattern determination process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This winning effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional pattern or the like as an effect pattern in the big hit gaming state, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in S320, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any one of “01H” to “08H” to the winning effect pattern flag in accordance with the special symbol stop symbol designation information included in the received winning start display command. As for the winning effect pattern flag, “01H” corresponds to a normal bonus, and “02H” to “07H” are a large extra bonus, a middle extra bonus 1, 2, a small extra bonus 1, 2, and a no extra bonus, respectively. Correspondingly, “08H” corresponds to a small hit. If this process ends, the process moves to S321.

  In S321, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” to “07H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an extra bonus or no extra bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” to “07H”, the process proceeds to S322. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of “02H” to “07H”, the process proceeds to S328.

  In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of selecting an additional pattern selection table in accordance with the value of the winning effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S323.

  In S323, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected addition pattern selection table and performs a process of selecting one of the addition patterns. At this time, for example, any additional pattern can be selected using a random number for determining the effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S324.

  In S324, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value corresponding to the selected addition pattern in the addition pattern flag. In the present embodiment, 21 additional patterns are provided as the additional patterns, and each of the large additional patterns 1 to 4, the middle and upper additional patterns 1 to 8, the small additional patterns 1 to 8, and the non-additional pattern 1 has an additional pattern. Flags “01H” to “15H” correspond. If this process ends, the process moves to S325.

  In S325, the sub CPU 71 refers to the additional character selection table and performs a process of selecting the additional character according to the value of the additional pattern flag. At this time, for example, any additional character can be selected using the random number for determining the effect. As the additional character, an additional character of “animal”, “female”, or “fireworker” is selected. If this process ends, the process moves to S326.

  In S326, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data in the hit start interval corresponding to the value of the additional pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data until the start of the round game, including the display of the added character determined based on the added character selection table and the display of the added number as the initial value. If this process ends, the process moves to S327.

  In S <b> 327, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “240” in the prize ball number counter. This value of “240” corresponds to at least the number of prize balls that will be paid out in the round game of 16R, and is displayed as the initial value of the number of expected prize balls in the hit start interval. If the number of extras is not notified at all, that is, if there is no extra bonus, the initial value “240” is continuously displayed without being added over each round. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished.

  In S328, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data during the hit start interval according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data until the start of the round game corresponding to the normal bonus or the small hit. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished.

[Direction processing during round]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the in-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This in-round effect process is a process for determining whether or not to report the additional number for each round, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. The round counter is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time a round game is executed (every time a winning prize opening display command is received), and the number of currently executed round games (the number of round games executed). This is a counter for indicating the number of times), and is basically counting the same value as the special winning opening opening number counter used in the main CPU 61. If this process ends, the process moves to S331.

  In S331, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an extra bonus (including no extra bonus) is being executed based on the value of the winning effect pattern flag. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag corresponds to any of “02H” to “07H” and it is determined that the bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S332. On the other hand, if the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “02H” to “07H” and it is determined that the bonus is not being executed, the process proceeds to S336.

  In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of selecting an additional pattern table in accordance with the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S333.

  In S333, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected addition pattern table, and performs a notification of the addition number based on the value of the addition pattern flag (addition pattern) and the value (round number) indicated by the round number counter. The process which determines whether it is is is performed. If it is determined that it is a round in which the additional number is notified, the process proceeds to S334. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a round in which the additional number is notified, the process proceeds to S336.

  In S334, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for reporting the number of additions based on the addition pattern table. As a result, the added number is displayed together with the selected added character in the display area 4A during the corresponding round. If this process ends, the process moves to S335.

  In S335, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a value corresponding to the additional number to the prize ball number counter. Thereby, in the prize ball number counter, the additional number defined based on the additional pattern table is added from the initial value “240”, and the counter value increases to the planned number of prize balls for each addition. For example, in the case of the large extra pattern 4, the extra number “135” is added at the 1R, 4R, and 7R, and the final award number “645” that is combined with the initial value “240” is displayed. Will be. The scheduled number of winning balls is displayed based on the value of the winning ball number counter, but the number of scheduled winning balls is not displayed immediately after addition to the winning ball number counter, and an effect corresponding to the addition is executed. Addition is displayed later. If this process ends, the process moves to S336.

  In S336, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data during the round according to the value of the round number counter. For example, in the case of an extra bonus, the sub CPU 71 sets data for displaying different effects including background images for the 1R to 7R eyes and the 8R to 16R eyes. In the case of a normal bonus and a small hit, the same effect data is always set in any round. When this process is finished, the round production process routine is finished.

[Ending effect processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in the hit end interval at the end of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in S340, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” to “07H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the bonus is an extra bonus or no extra bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” to “07H”, the process proceeds to S341. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “02H” to “07H”, the process proceeds to S342.

  In S341, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the prize ball counter and resetting the counter value. The planned number of winning balls is displayed based on the value of the winning ball number counter, but the number of scheduled winning balls is not displayed as 0 immediately after the resetting of the winning ball number counter. At the same time, the display of the number of scheduled prize balls can be switched. Further, when the value of the prize ball counter is reset, the scheduled prize ball number may not be displayed as “0”, but the display of the scheduled prize ball number itself may be hidden. If this process ends, the process moves to S342.

  In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting end effect data according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data at the end of the winning gaming state. At this time, as end effect data, data of different effect contents is set according to any of normal bonus, extra bonus (including no extra bonus), and small hit. If this process ends, the process moves to S343.

  In S343, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” in the hit effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S344.

  In S344, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” in the round number counter. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

[Example of operation when over-winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, an operation example when an over winning is generated at the special winning opening 37 will be described.

  FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the special winning opening shutter 37A when an over winning is generated. 39 and 40 schematically show the behavior from the start of the hit start interval in the extra bonus to the interval between rounds after the 1R and the end of the 2R, for convenience, the 1R and 2R The interval pattern d between the eyes is different from that shown in FIG. The game balls are continuously fired immediately after the start of the hitting start interval, and after a uniform 3.1 s, the right winning portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A (the right end portion of the corresponding big winning prize opening 37 in the open state). Shall reach. Each game ball is given an order such as (0), (1),.

  First, as shown in FIG. 39A, the big prize opening shutter 37A keeps the big prize opening 37 in a closed state until, for example, 2.5 s which is a hit start interval time elapses. That is, since the hit start interval time is shorter than the shortest time 3 s required for the game ball to reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A after the game ball is launched, immediately after the start of the hit start interval. Even if the game ball launching operation by right-hand strike is started, the game ball does not reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A which closes the big prize opening 37.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39B, when the hit start interval time elapses, the 1R-th start is started, and the special winning opening shutter 37A is opened in the open arrow direction by retreating in the direction of the outlined arrow. And Even at this time, the game ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39 (C), the game ball (0) launched immediately after the start of the hitting start interval is released from the large winning opening 37 that is opened along the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 (not shown). Rolls to near right end.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39 (D), the game ball (0) passes through the opened big winning opening 37 and falls downward, and a winning is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370. . That is, when a winning that reaches the prescribed winning number “1” is detected, the first round ends, and the interval between rounds before the start of the second round starts. At this time, the time from the start of the hit start interval until the winning of the game ball (0) launched immediately after that is about 3.2 s.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39 (E), along with the start of the interval between rounds, the big prize opening shutter 37A starts to project in the direction of the white arrow to make the big prize opening 37 closed again. To do. At this time, the special winning opening shutter 37A completes the operation of projecting from the open position to the closed position in about 0.01 s. Moreover, since the launch interval of the game balls is 0.66 s, the next game ball (1) has reached the vicinity of the right end of the big prize opening 37 that is in the transition to the closed state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (F), when the big prize opening shutter 37A completely closes the big prize opening 37 during the round interval before the 2R start, the game ball (1) It reaches the right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A. The time for the game ball (1) to reach such a position is approximately 3.1 s after the launch, and is approximately 0.56 s when calculated from the start point of the interval between rounds (the point in FIG. 39D). After the lapse.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 40 (G) to (I), the special prize opening shutter 37A closes the special prize opening 37 until the time defined as the interval between rounds, for example, 2.97s of the interval pattern d elapses. State. Meanwhile, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the game balls (1) to (4) pass from the right side to the left side in a line. At this time, the game balls (1) to (4) sequentially reach the right end portion of the big prize shutter 37A approximately every 0.66 seconds, and roll at a speed of about 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. To go. As a result, the four game balls (1) to (4) are in a state of being positioned with an interval of about one on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. In addition, when counting from the start time of the interval between rounds (the time point of FIG. 39D), the time to reach the state of FIG. 40G is approximately 1.22 seconds later and reaches the state of FIG. The time is after about 1.88 s, and the time to reach the state of FIG. 40 (I) is after about 2.54 s.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (J), when 2.97 s of the interval pattern d elapses, the interval between rounds ends and the second round starts, and the prize winning opening shutter 37A has an operation time of about 0.01 s. By retreating in the direction of the white arrow, the grand prize winning opening 37 is again opened. At this time, the game balls (1) to (4) are still passing at a relatively low speed on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. As a result, the four game balls (1) to (4) pass through the open big winning opening 37 all at once and fall downward, and the big winning opening counting switch 370 gives four wins. Is detected. That is, immediately after the start of the second round when the interval between rounds is over, three over-winnings are detected in addition to one of the predetermined number of winnings from four. Similarly, if the interval pattern c is 2.31s, 1 + 2 over winnings are detected, and if the interval pattern b is 1.65s, 1 + 1 over winnings are detected and the interval pattern a 0 .3 s, it can be easily understood that only one winning corresponding to the prescribed number of winnings is detected and no over winning is detected.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (K), the winning of the game ball (game ball (4) not shown in the figure in the figure) that has first reached the position of the big winning opening count switch 370 is detected, so that 2R The eye ends and the interval between rounds before the start of the 3R eye starts. At this time, the next game ball (5) is positioned in the vicinity of the right end of the special winning opening 37 that is in the transition to the closed state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (L), in the interval between rounds before the start of the third round, when the big prize opening shutter 37A completely closes the big prize opening 37 again, the game ball (5) The right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A will be reached. By controlling such a series of operation timings based on the interval patterns b to d, 1 to 3 over-winnings are realized in a predetermined round after the 2R.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining various operation timings related to the special winning opening, and shows the operation timing in the extra bonus according to FIGS. 39 and 40. In FIG. 41, for convenience, the interval pattern d is applied as the interval between rounds between the 1R and 2R and after the end of the 2R, unlike the one shown in FIG. The “fired state” indicates a state in which a firing operation is not performed or a firing stop operation is performed as “not fired”, and a state in which a firing operation is performed is denoted as “fired”. “Game state” indicates a round game and an interval in the big hit game state. “Required time” indicates the time required for the round game and the interval. “Big prize opening” indicates a closed state or an open state of the big prize opening 37. “The number of balls on the shutter” indicates the number of game balls located along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. The “elapsed time after the change in the number of balls on the shutter” indicates the elapsed time when the number of game balls on the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37A is changed. The “shown state” indicates a symbol at the end of FIGS. 39 (A) to 40 (L). In addition, (E) and (K) shown as illustrated states are marked with “*” because the special winning opening 37 is not completely closed.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the big hit is confirmed (the big hit starts) and the launch operation is started after about 0.1 s, the time until the game ball is actually fired is about 0.66 s. The time required for the game ball thus fired to reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A is approximately 3.1 s. On the other hand, at the time when 2.5 s has passed as the winning start interval after the big hit is confirmed, the big winning opening 37 is in an open state. Thereby, the game ball that has reached the position corresponding to the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A is detected by the special winning entry count switch 370 in approximately 0.1 s. That is, after the jackpot is confirmed, the launch operation is started, and the time until the first game ball thus fired is detected by the big prize count switch 370 is 0.1 + 0.66 + 3.1 + 0.1 = 3.96 s. The time 1.46 s obtained by subtracting the time 2.5 s of the hit start interval from this time is the 1R opening time.

  Thereafter, an interval between rounds after the end of the first round starts, and the special winning opening 37 is closed again. At this time, the special winning opening 37 is closed for 2.97 seconds of the interval pattern d. Then, in the closed prize opening shutter 37A in the closed state, the number of game balls located on the upper surface increases by about every 0.66 s until the start of the 2Rth when the prize winning opening 37 is opened again. Four game balls are supported by the special winning opening shutter 37A. Therefore, when the 2R-th is started and the big winning opening 37 is opened, the winning of four game balls is detected. When a winning of one game ball is detected for the first time after about 0.1 s, the big winning opening 37 is closed and an interval between rounds after the end of the second round is started. A winning game ball is detected. As described above, if the interval time between rounds is 2.97 s of the interval pattern d, 1 + 3 over winnings can be realized. Similarly, if the interval pattern c is 2.31s, 1 + 2 over winnings can be realized, and if the interval pattern b is 1.65s, 1 + 1 over winnings can be realized.

[Additional bonus screen display example]
42 to 44 are diagrams illustrating examples of screen display of an extra bonus. 42 shows a screen display example of an extra bonus corresponding to the large extra pattern 1, FIG. 43 shows an example of screen display of an extra bonus corresponding to the small extra pattern 5, and FIG. 44 corresponds to the no extra pattern 1. It is an example of a screen display of an extra bonus to be performed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 42A, when a large extra bonus corresponding to the hit pattern 2 is determined as the extra bonus and the great extra pattern 1 is selected as the extra pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval On the top, an image 700 indicating the start of the extra bonus is displayed, and an image 701 for prompting a right strike is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702A, for example, “Fireworks” selected by lottery, appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating the initial value “+240” of the scheduled prize ball number is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), when the 1R eye is started, a display field 704 indicating the type of the added character is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the number of expected prize balls for each addition of the added number. And a display field 706 for displaying the first half round period as an “additional special zone” and a second half round period as a “prize ball increase zone” to be described later. Such display fields 704 to 706 are displayed until the end of the 16th round. For example, in the display field 704, “Fireworks” corresponding to the additional character 702A is displayed until the end of the 16th round. On the other hand, in the display column 705, after the additional number is displayed in the center of the screen, the planned number of winning balls including the additional number is displayed in addition. In the large addition pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the 1R (see FIG. 12), in the 1R, only the initial value “240” is displayed in the display field 705 and the center of the screen is displayed. No additional number is displayed on. The display field 706 basically displays an “additional special zone” from the 1st to the 7th R, and a “prize ball increase zone” from the 8th R. As a result, the “addition-specific zone” is displayed in the 1R display column 706. In addition, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the “addition bonus” may be simply displayed instead of the “prize ball increase zone” in the display column 706 after the 8th R. The “additional special zone” displayed in the display field 706 indicates that the addition display of the number of scheduled prize balls is performed with a high probability. The “prize ball addition zone” displayed in the display field 706 indicates that the game is in a round game where over winning can be expected. The “extra bonus” displayed in the display field 706 indicates that a round game in which an over-winning due to the extra bonus cannot be expected. An “addition bonus” image 700 displayed at the top of the display area 4A indicates the start of the addition bonus.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (C), when the 2Rth is started, it is specified that the additional number “30” is displayed in the 2R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 12). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, and then an additional number 703A of “+30” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), when the third round is started, the expected number of winning balls “270” including the addition number 703A of “+30” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is stipulated that the addition number is not displayed in the 3R (see FIG. 12), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 3R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42E, when the 4R-th is started, it is specified that the additional number “105” is displayed in the 4R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 12). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, followed by an additional number 703B of “+105”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (F), when the 5R-th is started, the expected number of winning balls “375” including the addition number 703B of “+105” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is stipulated that the addition number is not displayed in the 5R (see FIG. 12), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 5R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (G), when the 6R-th is started, the same number of the expected prize balls “375” as in the previous round is continuously displayed in the display field 705. Further, in the large extra pattern 1, since it is defined that the extra number is not displayed in the 6R (see FIG. 12), the extra character 702A and the extra number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 6R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (H), when the 7th R is started, it is specified that the additional number “270” is displayed in the 7R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 12). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, and then an additional number 703C of “+270” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (I), when the 8th R is started, the expected number of winning balls “645” including the addition number 703C of “+270” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. Also, as shown in FIGS. 42 (I) and 42 (J), a “prize ball increasing zone” is displayed in the display field 706 of the 8R to 16R. Further, in the large extra pattern 1, since it is defined that the extra number is not displayed from the 8th to the 16th R (see FIG. 12), the extra character 702A and the extra number are added to the center of the screen in the 8th to 16th R. Not displayed, the display field 705 displays that the planned number of winning balls has finally become “645”. Although a player cannot effectively generate an over-winning in the first half round by such a series of display of the number of extras and the number of scheduled prize balls, the second half round can be used as a guide for the number of scheduled prize balls displayed in addition. The game can be advanced while expecting an over-winning prize, and the fun of the game can be enhanced along with the effects.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 43A, when the small additional bonus 2 corresponding to the hit pattern 6 is determined as the additional bonus and the small additional pattern 5 is selected as the additional pattern, the display area 4A in the hit start interval is displayed. On the screen, an image 700 indicating the start of the extra bonus is displayed, and an image 701 for prompting a right strike is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702B selected by lottery, for example, “animal” appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating the initial value “+240” of the expected number of prize balls is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), when the 1R eye is started, display columns 704 to 706 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In this 1R, “animal” corresponding to the additional character 702B is displayed in the display field 704. The small addition pattern 5 also stipulates that the addition number is not displayed in the first R (see FIG. 12). In the first R, only the initial value “240” is displayed in the display field 705. The added number is not displayed in the center.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 43B and 43C, the “upward specialization zone” is displayed in the display column 706 of the 1R to 7R. Further, in the small extra pattern 5, since it is defined that the extra number is not displayed from the 1st to the 7th R (see FIG. 12), in the 1st to the 7th R, the extra character 702B and the extra number are in the center of the screen. Not displayed, the display field 705 continues to display the planned number of winning balls without changing from the initial value “240”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), when the 8th eye is started, “addition bonus” is displayed in the display field 706. In addition, in the small additional pattern 5, since it is defined that the additional number “135” is displayed in the 8th R (see FIG. 12), after the additional character 702B is displayed at the center of the screen of the display area 4A. , An additional number 703D of “+135” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (E), when the 9th eye is started, a “prize ball increase zone” is displayed in the display field 706. In addition, in the display column 705, the planned number of winning balls “375” obtained by adding the additional number 703D of “+135” displayed in the previous round is added and displayed. Furthermore, in the small additional pattern 5, since it is defined that the additional number is not displayed after the 9th R (see FIG. 12), the additional character 702A and the additional number are not displayed at the center of the screen after the 9R. In the display column 705, it is displayed that the planned number of winning balls has finally become “375”. Even with such a series of display of the number of extras and the expected number of winning balls, the player cannot substantially generate an overwin until the second half of the round (from 1R to 13R), but is added and displayed. The game can be advanced while expecting an over win until the final round (16R) with the planned number of winning balls as a guideline, and the fun of the game can be enhanced along with the effects.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 44A, when an extra bonus according to the hit pattern 7 is determined as the extra bonus and the no extra pattern 1 is selected as the extra pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval On the top, an image 700 indicating the start of the extra bonus is displayed, and an image 701 for prompting a right strike is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702C, for example, “female” selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 showing the initial value “+240” of the planned number of winning balls is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), when the 1R eye is started, display columns 704 to 706 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In this 1R, “female” corresponding to the additional character 702C is displayed in the display field 704. In the no-addition pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in all rounds including the 1R (see FIG. 12), the initial value “240” is displayed in the display field 705 in the 1R. The additional number is not displayed in the center of the screen.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 44B to 44D, in the 1st to 16th eyes, the added character 702B and the added number are not displayed in the center of the screen, and the display field 705 shows the initial number of expected winning balls. The display is continued without changing from the value “240”. As shown in FIGS. 44 (C) and 44 (D), the “addition bonus” is simply displayed in the display column 706 from the 8th R.

  The added character may appear in response to the operation of the effect button, and the added number may be displayed after the appearance. In addition, the added character appearing after the 8Rth and the added character appearing before the 7Rth may be different from each other in appearance, for example, even in the same person. As a numerical value to be displayed, when a game ball wins a prize winning opening, “+15” corresponding to the number of winning balls may be displayed, and the number of payouts or the number of payouts may be displayed cumulatively. Further, regarding the expected number of winning balls, an assumed numerical value may not be directly displayed but indirectly suggested by, for example, light or sound. In “Additional Bonus”, the display of the number of scheduled award balls is displayed in the round following the round in which the number of additional balls is displayed. Alternatively, the number of scheduled prize balls may be added and displayed in rounds after the round in which the additional number is displayed.

[Effects of the gaming machine of the first embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the number of game balls that exceed the prescribed number of winnings in the next round game is the suppression unit 430 (large winning mouth shutter). 37A is controlled so as to flow into the upper surface of 37A. Specifically, in the interval patterns b to d, the time is controlled so that two or more game balls can simultaneously pass through the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. As a result, when the big winning opening shutter 37A is opened from the closed state of the interval between rounds in response to the start of the round game, a larger number of game balls than the prescribed winning number that has flowed onto the big winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state. Is led to the big winning opening 37, so that it is possible to realize an over winning in a predetermined round game and to enhance the interest in the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, by appropriately controlling the interval time between rounds in which the big prize opening 37 is closed between the desired round game without changing the opening time of the big prize opening shutter 37A, The number of over winnings can be adjusted appropriately. Specifically, with respect to the interval between rounds, the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 7 which is a relatively short time (interval pattern a) and the hit pattern 2 which is longer than that (interval patterns b to d) By providing 6 jackpot game states, the number of prize balls awarded based on over winnings can be varied according to the time between the rounds. Can be attached.

  In addition, an over winning prize that will be awarded to the grand prize opening 37 according to the number of prize balls given each time a game ball wins the big prize opening 37, the number of round games executed, and the interval time between rounds. Based on the estimated number of winnings including the number, it is possible to pre-calculate the expected number of winning balls in the jackpot gaming state and report the scheduled number of winning balls as an additional number or initial value. As to whether or not the number of prize balls can be obtained, it is possible to notify of novel contents rich in unexpectedness and diversity, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the big hit gaming state.

  In the first embodiment, the over-winning is basically realized by adjusting the interval time between the rounds after the 7th round. For example, by making the hit start interval time relatively long You may make it possible to make an over-winning from the 1Rth.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

[Specifications of gaming machines]
First, the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 45, the jackpot probability of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot gaming state is 1 / 399.60 (164/65536) when the probability is low (non-probability variable gaming state), and when the probability is high (probability gaming state) ) Is 1 / 130.54 (502/65536). The small hit probability of the special symbol in the small hit gaming state is 1 / 299.25 (219/65536) in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The order of digestion of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is digested in preference to the lottery based on the second special symbol. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), an ST gaming state in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 180 times is implemented.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. In the first special symbol jackpot symbol “probability change 1”, the winning pattern is 1, and 16R is given as the number of rounds of the round game (of which 7R is the actual number of rounds that are easy to win in the jackpot). The bonus name shown is “normal bonus”, and the bonus content is “7R bonus”. With regard to the “normal bonus”, the estimated winning numbers from the 1R to 7R are 10 and the estimated winning numbers from the 8R to 16R are 0 with respect to winning in the big winning opening 37. Thereby, in the “normal bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 1050. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability change 1” as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 100/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability change 1”, the winning pattern is 2, and the round number 16R (the actual round number is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is “large extra bonus”, and the bonus content is “large extra bonus” Bonus ”. This “large bonus” has 10 estimated winnings from 1R to 7R and 12 estimated winnings from 8R to 16R. As a result, in the “large bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 2670. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability change 1” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 50/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 2”, the winning pattern is 3, and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “middle bonus 1”, and the bonus content is “medium” The bonus is 1 ”. The “middle bonus 1” has 10 estimated winnings from the 1R to 7R and 11 estimated winnings from the 8R to 16R. As a result, the number of scheduled award balls is “2535” in “middle top bonus 1”. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability variation 2” as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 3”, the winning pattern is 4 and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “medium bonus bonus 2”, and the bonus content is “medium” The bonus is 2 ”. The “middle bonus bonus 2” has 10 estimated winnings from the 1R to 11R, 11 estimated winnings from the 12R, and 12 estimated winnings from the 13R to 16R. As a result, the number of planned award balls is “2535” in “middle top bonus 2”. The probability (inrush rate) of “probability 3” as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 5/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 4”, the winning pattern is 5, and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “small extra bonus”, and the bonus content is “small extra bonus” Bonus ”. The “small extra bonus 1” has 10 estimated winnings from 1R to 16R. As a result, in the “small extra bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 2400. The probability (entrance rate) of “probability variation 4” as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 35/100.

  The small hit has the same contents as the small hit according to the first embodiment described above except that the hit pattern 6 corresponds.

  The big winning mouth count number corresponds to a prescribed winning number that is an opportunity to end one round game, and in this embodiment, the big winning mouth count number (prescribed winning number) is set to “10”. That is, when 10 winning prizes are counted in one round, the round ends. Also in the present embodiment, the number of winning prize counts (specified number of winnings) does not define the upper limit of the number of winnings in one round. In other words, even when a winning exceeding the number of large winning mouth counts is detected in one round, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning number is paid out. As a result, it is possible to make an over-winning that exceeds the number of large winning mouth counts. This point will be described later.

  The short-time performance, the number of winning balls corresponding to the starting opening and each winning opening, the probability of winning a normal symbol, the number of winning symbols for a normal symbol, and the second starting opening winning count are the same as in the first embodiment.

  The specifications of the present embodiment may also have the following contents. For example, for special symbols, the jackpot probability at the low probability and the high probability is not limited to the above. In other words, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win the jackpot when the probability is high than when the probability is low. The small hit probability is not limited to the above. For example, the specification may be such that the winning probability in the other special symbol is higher than that in one special symbol. The special symbol digestion order may be a winning order without setting the priority order for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be a specification for preferential digestion of the first special symbol. The number of STs in which the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to the above. Further, the probability variation gaming state may continue until the next big hit win. The number of rounds is not limited to the above, and other round numbers other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The types of jackpot symbols are not limited to those described above. For example, you may increase the kind of jackpot symbol of a 1st special symbol. Further, an extra bonus may be executed even in the big hit gaming state based on the first special symbol. In the present embodiment, the number of winning prizes (specified number of winnings) is set to “10”, but is not limited to this. For example, the number of winning prizes may be set to 11 or more or less than 9. The short time performance may be greater than the ST count (the number of games in the probability variation gaming state), or may be less than the ST count including, for example, 0. The number of winning balls is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of winning balls related to the big winning opening is set to a value different from the above, the estimated number of winning balls is calculated using the value and the estimated winning number, and the number of extra balls to be described later is notified. Can be. For normal symbols, the hit probability at the low probability and the high probability is not limited to the above. For example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win when the probability is high than when the probability is low, and may be won when the probability is low, for example. The number of symbols per normal symbol is not limited to the above, and may be two or more, for example. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that the opening patterns of the blade members are associated with each other differently. The second start opening prize count may be a value other than the above.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 46, five types of opening / closing patterns A to E are defined as the one round opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening 37. The open / close patterns A to E are open / close patterns corresponding to the big hit game state, and the open / close pattern E is an open / close pattern corresponding to the small hit game state. The open / close pattern A and the open / close pattern E of the present embodiment are the same as the open / close pattern A and the open / close pattern C of the first embodiment, but the open / close patterns B to D of the present embodiment are the ones according to the first embodiment. Differently, it is defined to be in an open state a plurality of times (in this embodiment, twice) in one round game.

  The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern in which the open state is first 5.21 s, the closed state is 2.64 s, and then the open state is 3.00 s, and finally the closed state. The opening / closing pattern B is defined as a round interval from the first opening state to the final closing state. The section where the open state is 5.21 s or 3.00 s is shorter than the long opening of the opening / closing pattern A, and thus corresponds to the middle opening. A section that is closed for 2.64 seconds between two middle releases is referred to as an “inter-round interval” in the following description. That is, in the open / close pattern B, two middle releases occur with an interval during the round, and the total open time of the open / close pattern B is 8.21 s.

  The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern in which the open state is first 5.21 s, the closed state is 1.98 s, and then the open state is 3.00 s, and finally the closed state. The open / close pattern C is also defined as a round interval from the first open state to the final closed state. Such an open / close pattern C is also such that two middle releases occur across the mid-round interval, but the round interval time is shorter than the open / close pattern B. The total opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 8.21 s, which is the same as that of the opening / closing pattern B.

  The open / close pattern D is an open / close pattern in which the open state is first 5.21 s, then the closed state is 1.32 s, and then the open state is 3.00 s, and finally the closed state. The open / close pattern D is also defined as a round interval from the first open state to the final closed state. Such an open / close pattern D is also such that two middle releases occur across the interval during the round, but the interval time during the round is shorter than the open / close pattern C. The total opening time of the opening / closing pattern D is 8.21 s, which is the same as the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern C.

  The real round game in the big hit game state is a round game when the opening / closing control is performed based on the opening / closing patterns A to D including the long opening or middle opening in which the game ball can be won among the opening / closing patterns A to E described above. Applicable. The round game when the opening / closing is controlled based on the opening / closing pattern E is a non-substantial round game that does not correspond to the real round game.

  Note that the following contents may be used as the open / close pattern of one round. The open patterns are not limited to the above five types, and may be four types or less or six types or more. For the opening / closing pattern A, the opening time is not 10 s but may be, for example, less than 10 s or more than 10 s, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can win. Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the open / close patterns B to D, it is opened twice during one round, but may be opened three times or more. The middle opening time in the open / close patterns B to D may be a time that allows a predetermined number of game balls to win. Further, the opening / closing patterns B to D may have different middle opening times. About the opening time of middle opening, it can set suitably according to the time of the interval between rounds and the interval between rounds. For the opening / closing pattern E, the opening time is not 0.1 s, but may be, for example, less than 0.1 s or more than 0.1 s. Moreover, you may make it open | release in multiple times instead of opening only once in 1 round.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the round interval in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 47, a plurality of winning patterns 1 to 6 are defined as the special prize opening / closing patterns (winning patterns). As an interval pattern between rounds, only an interval pattern a having a closing time of 0.3 s is defined. The winning pattern 1 is a winning pattern that occurs in the case of a normal bonus and is specified as a specified round number of 16R and a real round number of 7R. The winning pattern 1 is defined such that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 7R rounds and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern E in the 8R to 16R rounds. That is, the hit pattern 1 stipulates that the substantial rounds are 7 rounds from 1R to 7R, and the remaining 9 rounds from 8R to 16R are executed as non-essential rounds.

  The winning pattern 2 is a winning pattern that is generated when the extra bonus is added, and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. The winning pattern 2 is defined such that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 7R rounds and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in the 8R to 16R rounds. In the extra bonus to be executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 2, the number of winning balls based only on the number of winning prizes (the number of predetermined winnings: 10) is 2400. 2670. For this reason, in the extra bonus, “2100” corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and a number “570” corresponding to the difference between this initial value and the expected number of prize balls is added in the first half round. It is reported as a number.

  The winning pattern 3 is a winning pattern that occurs when the medium addition bonus 1 is set and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. The winning pattern 3 is defined such that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 7R rounds and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C in the 8R to 16R rounds. In the middle addition bonus 1 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 3, the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes is 2400. However, when over-winning is included, the planned number of prize balls is 2535. Therefore, even in the medium addition bonus 1, “2100” corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and “435” corresponding to the difference between the initial value and the planned number of prize balls is displayed in the first half round. It is reported as an additional number.

  The winning pattern 4 is a winning pattern that is generated when the medium addition bonus 2 is set and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. In the winning pattern 4, the winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 7R rounds, the winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern D in the 8R to 11R rounds, and the winning prize in the 12R round. It is defined that the opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C, and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in the 13th to 16th rounds. In the middle extra bonus 2 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 4, the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes is 2400, but the number of scheduled prize balls is 2535 when over-winning is included. Therefore, in the medium addition bonus 2, “2100” corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and “435” corresponding to the difference between this initial value and the planned number of prize balls is indicated in the first half round or It is reported as an additional number in the second half round.

  The winning pattern 5 is a winning pattern that is generated when a small bonus is added, and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. The winning pattern 5 is defined such that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 7R rounds and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern D in the 8R to 16R rounds. In the small extra bonus executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 5, the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes is 2400, and over-winning is not detected. That is, the planned number of winning balls is 2400. Therefore, in the small extra bonus, “2100” corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and “300” corresponding to the difference between this initial value and the planned prize ball number is added in the first half round. It is reported as a number.

  The winning pattern 6 occurs in the small hit gaming state, and is defined so that the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern E only once. That is, the winning pattern 6 is executed as a winning pattern in which the possibility of winning a game ball with respect to the big winning opening 37 becomes extremely low.

  The hit pattern may have the following contents. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, on the premise that game balls are being continuously fired, an interval during round is set in the open / close patterns B to D. You may prescribe | regulate the time of the interval during a round as a reference | standard. For example, as the interval time during the round, a time corresponding to a predetermined number of assumed maximum arrival times may be defined based on the first middle opening time or the launch operation start time. Also, when it is difficult for over-winning to occur, the time during the round interval corresponding to this is large for the number of winnings during the round (the number of winnings detected with the first open state) and the interval during the round. It is preferable to set the time so that the total number of game balls assumed to be present on the winning opening shutter is equal to or less than the predetermined winning number, and in the case where an over winning is likely to occur, the corresponding interval during the round The total number of winning balls during the round (the number of winnings detected with the first open state) and the number of game balls assumed to be on the big winning opening shutter in the interval during the round is the prescribed number of winnings. It is preferable to set the time to exceed. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation where over-winning is easy and a situation where it becomes difficult depending on the interval time during the round. For example, in this embodiment, 2.64 s, which is the maximum time of an interval during a round, is defined as a time that can achieve 12 winnings per round (2 winnings per win), but 13 per round. The time in which the above winnings are possible may be used. However, as the number of over-winnings increases, the interval time during the round tends to become unnaturally long. In addition, the hit pattern 1 may be assigned with the same opening / closing pattern for all of the rounds, or may be different only in some rounds. As the hit pattern, the interval between rounds may be different. The hit patterns 2 to 5 may have different opening / closing patterns in some or all rounds. Further, the hit patterns 2 to 5 may have some round intervals different from each other.

[Additional pattern selection table]
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an additional pattern selection table. This additional pattern selection table is a table that is referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 55) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The extra pattern selection table is a table for selecting an extra pattern as a hit effect pattern described later according to the hit patterns 2 to 5. The additional pattern selection table is provided for each of the hit patterns 2 to 5 and defines various additional patterns that are matters to be determined and the selection rate (%) when selecting the additional pattern by lottery.

  According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 2) associated with the hit pattern 2, the extra patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the extra bonus. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 3) associated with the hit pattern 3, the middle add-on patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the middle extra bonus 1. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 4) associated with the hit pattern 4, the middle add-on patterns 5 to 9 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the middle extra bonus 2. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 5) associated with the hit pattern 5, the small extra patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the small extra bonus.

  It should be noted that the selection rate for allocating an additional pattern that is a decision item in the additional pattern selection table is not limited to that shown in FIG. In the added pattern selection table, the number of added patterns may be the same, or all may be different.

[Additional pattern table]
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an additional pattern table. This extra pattern table is a table that is referred to in the effect processing during the round (see FIG. 37) of the sub CPU 71 described above. The extra pattern table is a table for defining the extra number for the effect and the round for performing the notification according to the extra pattern. The additional pattern table is provided for each type of bonus, and defines an additional pattern and round number as reference items and an additional number as a decision item. In this embodiment as well, the additional number is notified together with the appearance of an additional character described later.

  According to the extra pattern table (large extra bonus) corresponding to the extra extra bonus, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each extra extra pattern 1 to 4 as an extra pattern. For example, in the large addition pattern 1, “100” is notified as the addition number in each of the 1R, 3R, and 5R, and “270” is notified as the addition number in the 7R. The total number of additions is “570”.

  According to the extra pattern table (medium extra bonus 1) corresponding to the middle extra bonus 1, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each of the intermediate extra patterns 1 to 4 as the extra pattern. For example, in the middle addition pattern 1, “100” is notified as the addition number in each of the 1R, 3R, and 5R, and “135” is notified as the addition number in the 7R. The total number added up is “435”.

  According to the extra pattern table (medium extra bonus 2) corresponding to the middle extra bonus 2, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each of the intermediate extra patterns 5 to 9 as the extra pattern. For example, in the middle addition pattern 5, “100” is notified as the addition number in each of the 1R, 3R, and 5R, “30” is notified as the addition number in each of the 8th to 10R, and the 11R “45” is reported as the additional number. The total number added up is “435”.

  According to the additional pattern table (small additional bonus) corresponding to the small additional bonus, the number of rounds and the notified additional number are defined for each of the small additional patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the small addition pattern 1, “100” is reported as the addition number in each of the 1R, 3R, and 5R. The total number added is “300”.

  Note that the numerical value for distributing the additional number in the additional pattern table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 49, and the additional number (570, 435, 300) obtained from the difference between the expected number of winning balls and the initial value is appropriately distributed. do it. In addition, after a numerical value exceeding the total added number is notified as an additional number, a numerical value to be notified may be set so as to be subtracted, so that the predetermined total additional number may be finally obtained. .

[Additional character lottery table]
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an additional character lottery table. The added character lottery table is a table that is referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 55) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The extra character lottery table is a table for selecting, by lottery, an extra character that appears at the start of the extra bonus or informing the extra number according to the extra pattern. The added character lottery table defines various added patterns as reference items, added characters as determined items, and a selection rate (%) when selecting an added character by lottery. As an additional character, “animal”, “female”, and “fireworker” are defined.

  For example, in the large addition patterns 1 to 4, it is defined that the selection rate of the additional character “fireworks” is the highest. In the middle-upward addition patterns 1 to 9, it is defined that the selection rate of the added characters “female” and “fireworker” is generally high, and the selection rate of the added characters “animal” is generally low. In the small addition patterns 1 to 4, the selection rate of the “animal” addition character is high, the selection rate of the “female” addition character is high next, and the selection rate of the “fireworks” addition character is generally low. It is prescribed. According to the added character appearing based on such an added character lottery table, the type of bonus is suggested, and the degree of expectation for the prize ball is also increased from the added number that is notified simultaneously with the appearance of the added character. be able to.

  Note that the selection rate for allocating additional characters in the additional character lottery table is not limited to that shown in FIG. For various added characters, additional patterns that cannot be selected may be defined. For example, the selection rate is defined so that the “animal” additional character cannot be selected only in the large additional pattern, and the “fireworker” additional character can be selected only in the middle additional pattern or the large additional pattern. May be.

[Control by main CPU and sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 and the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the process similar to what is based on 1st Embodiment, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted only by describing a figure number, a step number, etc. suitably.

  The processing of the main CPU 61 in the present embodiment includes main processing, timer interruption processing, switch input processing, special symbol related switch check processing, first start port switch check processing, second start port switch check processing, large winning port switch Check process, special symbol control process, special symbol memory check process, special symbol determination process, special symbol change time management process, special symbol display time management process, special symbol game end process are shown in FIGS. Since it is the same as that shown in FIG. 31, its description is omitted.

[Period start interval management processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. In this hit start interval management process, the processes of S350 to S360 are performed as the same processes as S200 to S210 shown in FIG. 27 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, in S360, the main CPU 61 sets data corresponding to any of the open / close patterns A to E as the special winning opening open data.

[Question management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the waiting time management process before reopening of the big winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. This waiting time question management process before reopening the big winning opening performs the processes of S370 to S377 as the same processes as S220 to S227 shown in FIG. 28 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, in S377, the main CPU 61 sets data corresponding to any of the open / close patterns A to E as the special winning opening open data.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. In this special winning opening opening process, the processes of S380 to S392 are performed as substantially the same processes as S230 to S242 shown in FIG. 29 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the processes of S381, S382, and S387 are as follows.

  In S381, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the big prize winning prize counter is “10” or more. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more, it moves the process to S384. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is not “10” or more, it moves the process to S382.

  In S382, the main CPU 61 executes a big winning opening / closing process corresponding to the set opening / closing pattern for each round in the type of jackpot and the current round. According to this process, when the open / close patterns B to D are set, an in-round interval that is closed during the round occurs. Thereby, over-winning in which the actual number of winnings is larger than the prescribed number of winnings is realized by using the interval during the round. In S382, the big prize opening opening / closing process corresponding to the opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit is also executed.

  In S387, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. In the present embodiment, the interval display time between rounds is always set to the time corresponding to the interval pattern a.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. In this hit end interval management process, the processes of S400 to S406 are performed as substantially the same processes as S250 to S256 shown in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment. However, in S <b> 405, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “180” as the ST count to the value of the probability variation counter in the main RAM 63.

  As processing of the sub CPU 71 in the present embodiment, main processing, command reception interrupt processing, timer interrupt processing, command analysis processing, and in-round effect processing are shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 and FIG. 37 according to the first embodiment. Since this is the same, the description thereof is omitted.

[Performance pattern determination process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. In the winning effect pattern determination process, the processes of S410 to S418 are performed as processes substantially similar to S320 to S328 shown in FIG. 36 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the processing of S410, S411, S414, and S417 is as follows.

  In S410, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any one of “01H” to “06H” to the winning effect pattern flag in accordance with the stop symbol designation information of the special symbol included in the received winning start display command. Regarding the winning effect pattern flag, “01H” corresponds to the normal bonus, “02H” to “05H” correspond to the extra bonus, the middle extra bonus 1, 2, and the minor extra bonus, and “06H” Corresponding to small hits. If this process ends, the process moves to S411.

  In S411, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” to “05H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an extra bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” to “05H”, the process proceeds to S412. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not “02H” to “05H”, the process proceeds to S418.

  In S414, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value corresponding to the selected addition pattern in the addition pattern flag. In the present embodiment, 17 additional patterns are provided, and the additional pattern flags “01H” to “01H” are added to the large additional patterns 1 to 4, the middle and upper additional patterns 1 to 9, and the small additional patterns 1 to 4, respectively. “11H” corresponds. If this process ends, the process moves to S415.

  In S417, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “2100” in the prize ball number counter. This value of “2100” corresponds to the number of prize balls that will be paid out in accordance with 14R of the 16R round game, and is displayed as the initial value of the number of scheduled prize balls in the hit start interval. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished.

[Ending effect processing]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. In this hit end effect process, the processes of S420 to S424 are performed as processes substantially similar to S340 to S344 shown in FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the processes of S420 and S422 are as follows.

  In S420, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” to “05H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the bonus has been ended based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” to “05H”, the process proceeds to S421. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not “02H” to “05H”, the process proceeds to S422.

  In S422, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting end effect data according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data at the end of the round game. At this time, as end effect data, data of different effect contents is set according to any of normal bonus, extra bonus, and small hit. If this process ends, the process moves to S423.

[Example of operation when over-winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, an operation example when an overwinning occurs at the special winning opening 37 will be described.

  FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the special winning opening shutter 37A when an over winning is generated. 57 and 58 schematically show the behavior from the interval between rounds immediately before 7R in the extra bonus to the 7Rth, and after the end of the 7R, again through the interval between rounds until reaching the 8Rth. The game balls are continuously fired and reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A (the right end portion of the corresponding big prize opening 37 in the open state) after a uniform 3.1 s. . Each game ball is given an order such as (1), (2),... Or (1 ′), (2 ′),... In order of launch. ') In order.

  First, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the big prize opening shutter 37A closes the big prize opening 37 in the interval between rounds immediately before the 7R-th start. The interval time between rounds is shorter than the time 0.66 s corresponding to the approximate firing interval in which the game ball first reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A after the big prize opening shutter 37A is closed (this time) In the embodiment, since it is 0.3 s), the game ball has not reached the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), when the interval time between rounds elapses, the 7R-th starts, and the big prize opening shutter 37A opens the big prize opening 37 by retracting in the direction of the white arrow. State. Even at this time, the game ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), for example, the game ball (1) launched in the interval between rounds is in the vicinity of the right end of the big winning opening 37 opened along the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 (not shown). Roll up to.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), the game ball (1) passes through the opened big winning opening 37 and falls downward, and the winning prize is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370. . That is, a winning corresponding to the beginning of the prescribed winning number “10” is detected. Thereafter, the game balls (2) to (9) (not shown) pass through the big prize opening 37 every 0.66 s of the firing interval and fall downward, and the winning prize is sequentially detected by the big prize opening count switch 370. The Rukoto.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), the next game ball (10) also passes through the opened big winning opening 37 and falls downward, and a winning is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370. Will be. Thus, when the winning corresponding to the end of the prescribed winning number “10” is detected, the seventh round ends, and the interval between rounds before the eighth round starts starts. At this time, approximately 9.8 s has elapsed since the start of the game ball (1) launch operation. The time of 9.8 s is the time 3.1 s for the first game ball (1) to reach the portion corresponding to the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A, and the game ball (1) is the big prize mouth count switch 370. Is calculated from the sum of the firing interval of 0.66 s × 10 as the time required for launching the ten game balls (1) to (10). Therefore, in the 7Rth that is open for a maximum of 10 seconds, it is possible to sufficiently detect the winnings of the ten game balls (1) to (10).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), when the interval between rounds is started again, the special prize opening shutter 37A protrudes in the direction of the white arrow, thereby closing the special prize opening 37 again. To do. At this time, since the launch interval of the game balls is 0.66 s, the next game ball (1 ') has reached the vicinity of the right end of the big winning opening 37 in the closed state.

  Then, when the time between the rounds of 0.3 s elapses, the 8th R starts, and as shown in FIG. 37 is opened. At this time, since the game ball (1 ′) has reached the portion corresponding to the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A, the gaming ball (1 ′) passes through the opened big winning opening 37. Then, it falls downward, and a winning is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), the game balls (2 ′) to (7 ′) and the game ball (8 ′) (not shown) pass through the big prize opening 37 every 0.66 s of the firing interval. The player falls downward, and the winning prize count switch 370 sequentially detects the winnings. When the game ball (8 ′) is detected from the start time of the 8th R, the time when the first game ball (1 ′) is detected by the big prize count switch 370 is 0.26 s, By setting the time required for firing the game balls (2 ′) to (8 ′) to the firing interval of 0.66 s × 7, approximately 4.88 s have elapsed. In other words, in the 8th eye, winnings of approximately eight game balls (1 ') to (8') are detected within the time (5.21 s) when the first middle is released.

  At time 821, when the first middle opening time of 5.21 s elapses, as shown in FIG. 58 (I), the big prize opening shutter 37A temporarily opens the big prize opening 37 due to an interval during the round. Closed. Then, when 0.66 s has elapsed from the state of FIG. 58 (H), that is, when approximately 5.54 s has elapsed from the start of the 8th R, the next game ball (9 ′) is the big prize opening shutter. It reaches the right end portion of 37A.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (J), the big prize opening shutter 37A closes the big prize opening 37 until 2.64 s, which is the time defined as the interval during the 8R round, elapses. Meanwhile, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the game balls (9 ') to (12') pass from the right side to the left side in a line. At this time, the game balls (9 ′) to (12 ′) sequentially reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A approximately every 0.66 seconds, and further rotate at a speed of about 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. It moves. As a result, the four game balls (9 ') to (12') are positioned with an interval of about one on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. In short, when counting from the state time of FIG. 58 (H), the state of FIG. 58 (J) is approximately 2.64 s elapsed, and approximately 7.52 s has elapsed from the 8R start time. In other words, in the interval during the 8R round, four game balls (9 ') to (12') can sufficiently exist on the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37A by the end of the interval.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (K), when the 8R round interval ends, the second middle release is performed, and the big prize opening shutter 37A is retracted in the direction of the white arrow to thereby win the big prize opening 37. Is opened again. At this time, the game balls (9 ') to (12') are still passing at a relatively low speed on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. As a result, the four game balls (9 ′) to (12 ′) simultaneously pass through the open big prize opening 37 and drop downward, and are given by the big prize opening count switch 370. A winning is detected. That is, in the first middle release in one round game, eight winnings are detected, and then in the middle opening immediately after the mid-round interval in the same round game, four winnings are detected. As a result, over-winning that exceeds the prescribed number of winnings of 10 will occur. Similarly, if the interval time during the round is 1.98 s, for example, 12 + 1 over-winnings occur, and if it is 1.32 s, it can be easily understood that no over-winning occurs.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining various operation timings related to the special winning opening, and shows the operation timing in the extra bonus according to FIGS. 57 and 58. “Launching state”, “Game state”, “Required time”, “Large winning mouth”, “Number of balls on shutter”, “Elapsed time after change of number of balls on shutter”, “State shown” are the figures described above. This is the same as the item shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 59, when game balls are being continuously fired, the time for which the first game ball (1) is detected by the big prize count switch 370 from the start time is about 0. 26 s, the time required to fire the next nine game balls (2) to (10) is the firing interval 0.66 s × 9 = 5.94 s, and the last game ball (10) is set by the big prize count switch 370 Since the detected time is about 0.1 s, the open time is about 6.3 s, which is the sum of these.

  Thereafter, the interval between rounds after the end of the 7th round starts, and the special winning opening 37 is closed again. At this time, the big prize opening 37 is closed for 0.3 s, but the next game ball (1 ′) has not yet reached the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A, and the big prize opening shutter 37A. There is no game ball on the top surface.

  Then, when the 8R-th starts and the first middle release is started, winnings of approximately eight game balls (1 ') to (8') are detected within the prescribed time of 5.21 s. This is because the time for which the first game ball (1 ′) is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 from the start of the 8th R is about 0.26 s, and the next seven game balls (2) to ( Since the time required for the firing in 8) is the firing interval of 0.66 s × 7 = 4.62 s, it is clear from the time that is the sum of these.

  Thereafter, the first middle release ends and the 8R round interval starts. In the interval during this round, the big prize opening 37 is temporarily closed for 2.64 seconds. At this time, it takes about 0.33 s for the next nine game balls (9 ′) to reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A from the start of the interval during the round, and the next three games Since the time required for launching the spheres (10 ′) to (12 ′) is the firing interval 0.66 s × 3 = 2.31 s, four game balls (within the time of 2.64 s, which is the sum of these, 9 ′) to (12 ′) are present on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A.

  Thereafter, when the interval during the 8R round is completed and the middle prize opening 37 is opened again by the second middle release, the four game balls (9 ′) to (9 ′) ˜ ( 12 ′) passes through the big winning opening 37, and four winnings are detected. When a winning of one game ball is detected, the big winning opening 37 is closed, and the 8R-th is finished and the next interval between rounds is started. That is, as the 8R opening / closing pattern, a maximum of 8 winnings can be detected by the first middle opening, and a maximum of 4 winnings can be detected by the second middle opening. The time is defined as 2.64 s, and as a result, 10 + 2 over-winnings are possible for the entire 8R. Similarly, by setting the interval time during the round to 1.98 s, 10 + 1 over winnings are possible, and by setting the interval time during the round to 1.32 s, no over winning is detected. Yes. As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum two over-winnings are realized mainly by appropriately setting the interval time during the round, but three or more over-winnings may be possible. However, when three or more over winnings are possible, the longitudinal dimension of the big winning opening shutter 37A is set to a length that allows at least four game balls to pass simultaneously, or the time for first middle opening is set appropriately. It is preferable.

[Additional bonus screen display example]
FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating a screen display example of an extra bonus. This figure shows a screen display example of an extra bonus corresponding to the extra extra pattern 1.

  First, as shown in FIG. 60A, when the extra bonus corresponding to the hit pattern 2 is determined as the extra bonus and the great extra pattern 1 is selected as the extra pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval On the top, an image 700 indicating the start of the extra bonus is displayed, and an image 701 for prompting a right strike is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702A, for example, “Fireworks” selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating the initial value “+2100” of the scheduled number of winning balls is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), when the 1R eye is started, a display field 704 indicating the type of the added character is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the number of expected prize balls for each addition of the added number. Is displayed, and a display field 706 is displayed for displaying the period of the first half round as an “additional specialization zone” and displaying the second half round as a “prize ball increase zone”. Such display fields 704 to 706 are displayed until the end of the 16th round. For example, in the display field 704, “Fireworks” corresponding to the additional character 702A is displayed until the end of the 16th round. On the other hand, in the display column 705, after the additional number is displayed in the center of the screen, the planned number of winning balls including the additional number is displayed in addition. In the large addition pattern 1, since it is defined that the addition number “100” is displayed in the 1R (see FIG. 49), after the addition character 702A is displayed in the center of the display area 4A, “ An additional number 703A of “+100” is displayed. The display field 706 basically displays an “additional special zone” from the 1st to the 7th R, and a “prize ball increase zone” from the 8th R. As a result, the “addition-specific zone” is displayed in the 1R display column 706.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60C, when the 2R-th is started, the expected number of winning balls “2200” including the addition number 703A of “+100” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is stipulated that the addition number is not displayed in the 2R (see FIG. 49), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 2R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), when the 3Rth is started, it is specified that the additional number “100” is displayed in the 3R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 49). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, and then an additional number 703B of “+100” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), when the 4R-th is started, the display field 705 includes the expected number of winning balls “2300” including the additional number 703B of “+100” displayed in the previous round. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is stipulated that the addition number is not displayed in the 4R (see FIG. 49), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 4R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), when the 5Rth is started, it is specified that the additional number “100” is displayed in the 5R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 49). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, followed by an additional number 703C of “+100”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), when the 6th R is started, the expected number of winning balls “2400” including the addition number 703C of “+100” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is stipulated that the added number is not displayed in the 6R (see FIG. 49), the added character 702A and the added number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 6R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), when the 7th R is started, it is specified that the additional number “270” is displayed in the 7R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 49). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, followed by an additional number 703D of “+270”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (I), when the 8th R is started, the expected number of winning balls “2670” including the addition number 703D of “+270” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 60I and 60J, “prize ball increase zone” is displayed in the display column 706 of the 8R to 16R. Furthermore, in the large extra pattern 1, since it is defined that the extra number is not displayed from the 8th to the 16th R (see FIG. 49), the extra character 702A and the extra number are added to the center of the screen in the 8th to 16th R. Not displayed, the display field 705 displays that the planned number of winning balls has finally become “2670”. Although a player cannot effectively generate an over-winning in the first half round by such a series of display of the number of extras and the number of scheduled prize balls, the second half round can be used as a guide for the number of scheduled prize balls displayed in addition. The game can be advanced while expecting an over-winning prize, and the fun of the game can be enhanced along with the effects.

[Effects of gaming machine of the second embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the same effects as those of the first embodiment.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in a predetermined round game, a game ball with less than the prescribed number of winnings (10 pieces) is fired during the first middle opening time when the big winning opening 37 is in an open state. The time required for passing through the shutter 37A, specifically, the time required for detecting winnings with respect to eight game balls is controlled, and then the large winning opening 37 is temporarily closed. The time is controlled so as to be the time for three or four game balls that are over-winning based on the previous eight to flow into the suppression unit 430 (the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37A). Yes.

  As a result, when the second middle release is performed next time in the round game, a maximum of 12 game balls, which are larger than the prescribed number of winnings, are combined from the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A. It will be led to the winning opening 37. Therefore, it is possible to realize an over winning in a predetermined round game, and to enhance the interest in the big hit game state.

  Moreover, in a predetermined round game, the number of over winning prizes is appropriately adjusted by appropriately controlling the interval time during the round in which the grand prize opening 37 is opened and closed several times, and the closing time is temporarily closed. can do.

  In addition, as a round game in which an over-winning is possible, for example, an opening / closing pattern D having a relatively short time is included for the interval time during the round without changing the time when the middle winning opening shutter 37A is first opened to the middle. By providing a winning game state of winning pattern 5 and a winning game state of winning patterns 2 and 3 including opening / closing pattern B and opening / closing pattern C for a relatively long time, the number of over winnings can be increased according to the interval time during the round. The number of winning balls to be paid out can be made different, and the degree of advantage can be made different by simply setting the interval time during the round for a plurality of big hit gaming states.

  In addition, a prize is awarded to the grand prize opening 37 according to the number of prize balls given each time a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 37, the number of round games executed, and the middle opening time and the interval time during the round. Based on the estimated number of winnings including the number of over winnings, it is possible to pre-calculate the expected number of winning balls in the jackpot gaming state and report the scheduled number of winning balls as an additional number or initial value. It is possible to provide notification of novel contents rich in unexpectedness and diversity as to how many prize balls can be obtained in the state, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the big hit gaming state.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. In addition, the specifications of the gaming machine of the third embodiment are almost the same as those of the first embodiment, but there is no small hit, the prescribed number of winnings is two, and the prescribed number of rounds is set to 3R Has been.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
First, the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 61, three types of opening / closing patterns A to C are defined as the one round opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening 37. The opening / closing pattern A and the opening / closing pattern B of the present embodiment are the same as the opening / closing pattern A and the opening / closing pattern B of the first embodiment. The open / close pattern C of the present embodiment is similar to the open / close pattern C of the second embodiment, but first the open state is 0.6 s, then the closed state is 1.98 s, and then the open state is 3.00 s. It is an opening and closing pattern that finally becomes a closed state after becoming. This open / close pattern C is also defined as a round interval from the first open state to the final closed state. Such an open / close pattern C is a short opening first, and then a second opening occurs as a middle opening across an interval during the round. The total opening time of the open / close pattern C is 3.6 s. All of the above-described opening / closing patterns A to C correspond to the substantial round game in the big hit game state.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a description will be given of the big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 62, a plurality of winning patterns 1 to 4 are defined as the special winning opening and closing patterns (winning patterns). As an interval pattern between rounds, an interval pattern a having a closing time of 0.3 s and an interval pattern b having a closing time of 2.97 s are defined. The winning pattern 1 corresponds to the extra bonus A, and is a winning pattern with the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds of 3R. The hit pattern 1 is such that all rounds from the 1R to the 3R are the opening / closing pattern A, and the interval between rounds between the 1R and the 2R and between the 2R and the 3R is the interval pattern a. It is prescribed. In such a winning pattern 1 (additional bonus A), two winnings equal to the prescribed winning number are detected in the 1R to 3R. As a result, the bonus number A for the bonus pattern 1 is 90, and the planned number of winning balls is 90.

  The winning pattern 2 corresponds to the extra bonus B and is a winning pattern in which the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 3R. The contact pattern 2 is defined such that the 1Rth is the opening / closing pattern A and the 2Rth and 3Rths are the opening / closing pattern B. Further, the interval between rounds between the 1R and 2R and between the 2R and 3R is defined to be an interval pattern b. In such a winning pattern 2 (addition bonus B), two winnings equal to the prescribed winning number are detected at the 1Rth, while the intervals between the rounds before the 2R start and before the 3R start are relatively long. Therefore, 2 + 2 over winnings are detected in the 2R and 3R eyes. As a result, in the bonus B for adding the winning pattern 2, the planned number of winning balls is 150.

  The winning pattern 3 corresponds to the extra bonus C, and is a winning pattern in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 3R. The contact pattern 3 is defined so that the 1Rth is the opening / closing pattern A and the 2Rth and 3Rths are the opening / closing pattern C. Further, the interval between rounds between the 1R and 2R and between the 2R and 3R is defined to be an interval pattern a. In such a winning pattern 3 (addition bonus C), two winnings equal to the prescribed winning number are detected in the 1R round, while the rounds having a relatively long closing time (1.98) in the 2R and 3R rounds. Since a mid-interval is provided, one winning is detected in the first open state in each of the 2R and 3R, and then 1 + 2 over wins are detected in the second open state after the end of the round interval Is done. As a result, in the bonus C for adding the winning pattern 3, the planned number of winning balls is 150.

  The winning pattern 4 corresponds to the extra bonus D, and is a winning pattern in which the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 3R. The hit pattern 3 is defined such that the 1R-th is the opening / closing pattern A, the 2R-th is the opening / closing pattern B, and the 3R-th is the opening / closing pattern C. The interval between rounds between the 1R and 2R is defined as an interval pattern b, and the interval between rounds between the 2R and 3R is defined as an interval pattern a. In such a winning pattern 4 (addition bonus D), two winnings equal to the prescribed winning number are detected in the 1Rth, while the interval pattern b having a relatively long interval between rounds before the start of the 2Rth 2 + 2 over winnings are detected in the 2R eye, and a relatively long closing time (1.98) interval is provided in the 3R, so in the first open state in the 3R eye After one winning is detected, 1 + 2 over winnings are detected in the second open state after the end of the interval during the round. As a result, in the bonus bonus D for the winning pattern 3, the planned number of winning balls is 150.

  In the third embodiment, as in the winning pattern 4, the round that achieves 2 + 2 over winnings by the interval between rounds (2R) and the round that realizes 1 + 3 over winnings by the interval between rounds (3R) 1) is mixed, but at least one hit pattern having such contents may be specified, and the specified round numbers of all or some of the hit patterns may be different. Further, as the types of intervals between rounds and intervals during rounds, more types may be provided according to specifications.

[Additional bonus effect pattern selection table]
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an extra bonus effect pattern selection table. The additional bonus effect pattern selection table is a table for collectively determining an additional pattern, an additional character, and an additional number corresponding to the type of the additional bonus as the contents of the effect during the round. The extra bonus effect pattern selection table is provided for each extra bonus A to D, and the number of rounds to be a reference item, the extra pattern to be decided, the extra character, the extra number, and various items to be decided by lottery. It defines the selection rate (%) for selection. It is assumed that an additional character appears and “60” is displayed as the initial value of the expected number of winning balls in the hit start interval before the 1R start of the additional bonus. Further, the extra bonus effect pattern selection table is referred to in a hit effect pattern determination process (not shown), and in this hit effect pattern determination process, an additional pattern, an additional character, and an additional number are determined.

  According to the additional bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus A) associated with the additional bonus A, the additional characters A-1 to A-4, “female” and “animal” corresponding to the additional bonus A are added. , And the additional number notified for each round number is selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the “female” additional character is selected in the additional pattern A-1, the additional number “30” is notified in the 1R, and the additional number is not notified in the 2R and 3R. A numerical value “90” obtained by summing up the added number notified in this way and the initial value “60” becomes the planned winning number.

  According to the additional bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus B) associated with the additional bonus B, the additional patterns B-1 to B-4, “fireworks” and “female” corresponding to the additional bonus B are added. The number of characters and the number of additions notified for each round are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the additional character “fireworker” is selected in the additional pattern B-1, the additional number “30” is notified in each of the first to third Rs. A numerical value “150” obtained by adding up the number of additions notified in this way and the initial value “60” is the planned winning number.

  According to the additional bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus C) associated with the additional bonus C, the additional patterns C-1 to C-6 corresponding to the additional bonus C, "fireworks", "female", " The additional character “animal” and the additional number notified for each round are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the additional character “fireworks” is selected in the additional pattern C-1, the additional number “30” is notified in the 1R, the additional number “10” is notified in the 2R, and the additional number is added in the 3R. The number “50” is notified. A numerical value “150” obtained by adding up the number of additions notified in this way and the initial value “60” is the planned winning number.

  According to the additional bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus D) associated with the additional bonus D, the additional patterns D-1 to D-6 corresponding to the additional bonus D, “fireworks”, “female”, “ The additional character “animal” and the additional number notified for each round are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when an additional character “Fireworks” is selected in the additional pattern D-1, the additional number “30” is notified in the 1R, the additional number “40” is notified in the 2R, and the additional number is added in the 3R. The number “20” is notified. A numerical value “150” obtained by adding up the number of additions notified in this way and the initial value “60” is the planned winning number.

  It should be noted that the selection rate for allocating an additional pattern, the number of additions, and the like, which are determination items in the additional bonus effect pattern selection table, is not limited to that shown in FIG. The additional bonus effect pattern selection table may be applied to the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above. For example, the additional number may be specified so as to be reported together on the 1R. The initial value of the planned number of winning balls is set to “60” as an example. However, by setting the initial value to “90”, for example, the added bonus A may not be notified.

[Effects of the gaming machine of the third embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, in addition to the same effects as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the following effects can also be obtained.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, a round game with an opening / closing pattern C that can realize an over winning by controlling the interval time during a round, and an over winning a prize by controlling the interval time between rounds as an interval pattern b. Since it is possible to provide the big hit game state of the hit pattern 4 that includes both the realizable open / close pattern B round games, the interest in the big hit game state can be further enhanced. Also, for example, a winning game state in which an over winning can be achieved by a round game (for example, the third round) that is opened twice with an interval during the round, such as a winning pattern 3 or a winning pattern 4, and a winning pattern 2 There is a jackpot gaming state in which an over winning can be achieved even in a round game (1R and 2R) that is open only once. That is, in any of the big hit gaming states in which the winning patterns are 2 to 4, it is possible to realize an over win exceeding the prescribed number of winnings in one round game, and thus it is possible to further enhance the interest in the big hit gaming state.

<First Variation of Big Winner Shutter>
Next, a first modified example of the special winning opening shutter will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.
[Specifications of the grand prize opening shutter according to the first modification]
First, the specifications of the special prize opening shutter 37B according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. Also in FIG. 64, the positional relationship between the big prize opening shutter 37B (big prize opening 37) and the big prize opening count switch 370 is schematically shown as different from FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 64, for example, when the diameter d of the game ball is 11 mm, the special winning opening shutter 37B has a longitudinal dimension L1 of about d × 12 = 132 mm. As a result, a maximum of 12 game balls can be simultaneously passed through the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37B in the closed state. However, also in this modified example, when one game ball is launched in response to the start of the launch operation, the firing interval until the next one game ball is launched, or one game ball is launched. In consideration of the arrival time until the game ball is positioned at the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37B, a maximum of six game balls can be assumed to pass at the same time. Further, the longest time until the game ball reaching the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37B is detected by the big prize opening count switch 370 is about 1.32 s. .32 s (may be 1.32 s or more). Thereby, it is possible to reliably detect a game ball won in the previous round game before the special winning opening 37 is opened again. Further, in the inter-round interpal, it is possible that a gaming ball exceeding the prescribed number of winnings cannot exist on the big winning opening shutter 37B. The time required for the special winning opening shutter 37B to move from one position to the other position among the position where the special winning opening 37 is closed and the position where the special winning opening 37 is opened is the same as that of the above-described embodiment. It is the same as that by.

  When applying such a large winning opening shutter 37B, the number of firings per minute is 90.90 per minute and the firing interval is 0.66 seconds as in the above-described embodiment. Assume that approximately 3.00 to 3.33 seconds are required as the time to reach the right end portion of the winning opening shutter 37B. The upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37B is inclined so that the game ball advances 11 mm in 0.33 seconds, that is, advances 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. Other points are the same as in the above-described embodiment. As a result, a maximum of six game balls can be passed at the same time.

[Example of operation when over-winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, an operation example when over winning occurs when the special winning opening shutter 37B is applied will be described.

  FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the big prize opening shutter 37B when an over winning is generated. 65 and 66 schematically show the behavior from the hit start interval to the 1R to 4R start, but according to the embodiment described above, the interval between rounds and the open time between rounds are different. Different. Each game ball is given an order such as (0), (1),... In the firing order regardless of the round update. In addition, the prescribed number of winnings is “3” as an example.

  First, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the big prize opening shutter 37B closes the big prize opening 37 in the hit start interval.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), when the specified time of the hit start interval elapses, the 1R-th starts, and the special winning opening shutter 37B retracts in the direction of the white arrow to open the special winning opening 37. Leave open. Even at this time, the game ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the game ball (1) launched after the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the 1Rth rolls to the vicinity of the right end of the big winning opening 37 which has been opened.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the game ball (1) passes through the opened big winning opening 37 and falls downward, and a winning is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370. . At this time, since the number of winnings for the 1R has not yet reached the prescribed number of winnings “3”, the large winning opening 37 is kept open.

  Then, when approximately 1.32 s has elapsed from the state of FIG. 65D, the third game ball (3) is placed at a portion corresponding to the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37B, as shown in FIG. 65E. To reach. As a result, the winning of the game ball (3) is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370, and the big winning opening shutter 37B closes the big winning opening 37 accordingly, and the interval between rounds before the 2R start is started. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), when the big prize opening shutter 37B is in a state of completely closing the big prize opening 37 during the round interval before the 2R start, the game balls (4), ( 5) reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37B and rolls from the right side to the left side along the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37B. The state shown in FIG. 65 (F) is approximately 1.32 seconds after the start of the interval between rounds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), when the 2R-th starts, the special winning opening shutter 37B opens the special winning opening 37. At this time, since the game balls (4) and (5) are in a passing state on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B, the two game balls (4) and (5) are in an open state. After passing through the big prize opening 37 all at once, they fall downward, and the big prize opening count switch 370 detects two prizes. Further, the next game ball (6) has rolled to the vicinity of the right end of the large winning opening 37 that has been opened, and this game ball (6) will soon be detected as winning. As a result, the special winning opening shutter 37B closes the special winning opening 37 again, and the interval between rounds before the start of the third round starts. The state shown in FIG. 65G is approximately 1.72 s after the start of the inter-round interval, and 0.4 s from the start of the second round.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), when the big prize opening shutter 37B is in a state of completely closing the big prize opening 37 during the interval between rounds before the start of the third round, the game balls (7) to (7) to (7) 12) reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37B and rolls from the right side to the left side along the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (H) is approximately 3.76 s after the start of the interval between rounds, and 4.02 s after calculating from the state of FIG. 65 (G). Thus, in order to generate a state in which the six game balls (7) to (12) are present on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37B, the time between the rounds before the start of the third round is approximately 3 with a margin. .96s or so.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (I), when the 3rd eye starts, the big prize opening shutter 37B opens the big prize opening 37. At this time, since the game balls (7) to (12) exist on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B, these six game balls (7) to (12) are in an open state. Passing through the big prize opening 37 all at once and falling downward, the big prize opening count switch 370 detects six prizes. That is, immediately after the start of the third round when the interval between rounds ends, 3 + 3 over winnings are detected. The state shown in FIG. 66 (I) is approximately 3.97 seconds after the start of the interval between rounds, with the addition of a time 0.01 s required for the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening shutter 37B.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (J), the big prize opening shutter 37B closes the big prize opening 37 again, and the interval between rounds before the 4R start is started. Thereafter, the game ball (13) reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (J) is approximately 0.06 s after the start of the interval between rounds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (K), when the big prize opening shutter 37B is in a state of completely closing the big prize opening 37 during the round interval before the 4R start, the game balls (13) to (13) to (18) reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37B and rolls from the right side to the left side along the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (K) is approximately 3.36 s after the start of the interval between rounds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (L), when the 4R-th starts, the special winning opening shutter 37B opens the special winning opening 37. At this time, on the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37B, the game ball (13) does not fall to the big prize opening 37 by proceeding outward from the left end, while the following game balls (14) to (18) are not. Since there is a game ball (19) that is in the existing state and has just reached the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37B, these six game balls (14) to (19) are in the open prize state. Passing through all the mouths 37 and dropping downward, the winning prize count switch 370 detects six winnings. That is, immediately after the start of the 4th R when the interval between rounds ends, 3 + 3 over winnings are detected. Such a state of FIG. 66 (L) is after the time required for the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening shutter 37B from 0.01 s from the start of the 4R, and after approximately 3.97 s from the start of the interval between rounds. .

[Effects of the gaming machine of the first modification]
As described above, over-winning can also be realized by appropriately setting the prescribed number of winnings and the time of the interval between rounds using the large winning opening shutter 37B. It should be noted that, for example, the big winning opening 37 is opened until a certain period of time after which the game ball (6) can be won from the state of FIG. 66 (G), but from the state of FIG. 66 (G). It is immediately closed, specifically, it is closed in about 0.1 s from the start of the round, and then the big prize opening 37 is once closed for a predetermined time as an interval during the round, and then opened again. You may do it. At this time, for example, if the interval time during the round is about 1.32 s, two game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 2 over winnings are realized. Can do. If the interval time during the round is about 1.98 s, three game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 3 over winnings can be realized. If the interval time during the round is about 2.64 s, four game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 4 over winnings can be realized. Of course, over-winning may be realized by adjusting the time of the interval between rounds without providing the interval during the round.

<Second variation of game board and variable winning device>
Next, a second modification of the game board and the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the same or similar components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

[Game board]
As shown in FIG. 67, the game board 1 includes a second first prize opening 37 that allows an over-winning in the same way as the first prize winning opening in the first embodiment described above, and a known first that is difficult to over-win. It has a big prize opening 36. The first big prize opening 36 is provided in the upper part of the game area 1p. The first big prize opening 36 is provided with a first big prize opening shutter 36A for opening and closing it. The first big prize opening shutter 36A is configured to open and close the first big prize opening 36 by tilting in the front-rear direction. Such a first grand prize opening shutter 36A includes a first aspect in which the game ball is easily opened with respect to the passage area (first grand prize opening 36) and a second aspect in which it is difficult to close. Fluctuating members that can be varied are realized. Such a first big winning opening 36 is also opened in the big hit gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The second grand prize port 37, the second big prize port shutter 37A, the second big prize port count switch 370, and the second big prize port shutter solenoid 370A are assumed to have the same functions as those according to the above-described embodiment. Is provided. Although not particularly illustrated, a first grand prize port count switch and a first grand prize port shutter solenoid are also provided as those relating to the first grand prize port 36 having the same functions as these. That is, when a winning of a game ball with respect to the first big winning opening 36 is detected by the first big winning opening count switch, the payout device 83 pays out a predetermined number of gaming balls as the winning balls. Further, the first big prize opening shutter solenoid for driving the first big prize opening shutter 36A is exclusively controlled. As a result, the first grand prize opening shutter 36A is driven so as to change between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the first big prize opening 36 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. Is done. The opening driving of the first big prize opening 36 by the first big prize opening shutter 36A may be controlled exclusively with the opening driving of the second big prize opening 37 in the big hit gaming state. That is, for example, at the 1Rth, the second grand prize opening 37 can be opened based on a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and during that time, the first big prize opening 36 is continuously closed, and at the next 2R, The first big prize opening 36 can be opened based on a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and the second big prize opening 37 can be controlled to be closed continuously during that time.

  The second guide rail 30 'is the same as that of the above-described embodiment, but has the following configuration. In other words, the second guide rail 30 ′ is not provided with a convex portion that can contact the game ball. Therefore, the game ball flowing down through the second guide rail 30 ′ is released from the lower end 30 </ b> A ′ of the second guide rail 30 ′ without the traveling speed being reduced. The lower end 30 </ b> A ′ of the second guide rail 30 ′ is located in the vicinity of the upper right side of the second big prize opening 37, and is curved so as to release the game ball substantially in the left direction. As a result, the game ball released from the lower end 30A ′ of the second guide rail 30 ′ hits the right end portion of the second big prize opening shutter 37A when the second big prize opening shutter 37A described later is in a closed state. At the beginning of contact, it moves to the left while rolling along its upper surface.

  The second big prize opening shutter 37A is formed in the same size as that according to the first embodiment described above, but the upper surface thereof is an inclined surface having a relatively gentle downward-sloping tendency in the closed state. An upper surface 43a (not shown in FIG. 67) of the cover member 43 is connected to the left end of the closed second big prize opening shutter 37A, and has an inclined surface that tends to lower to the same extent as the second big prize opening shutter 37A. It has become. The upper surface 43a has an effect of decelerating a plurality of game balls that have moved along the upper surface of the second grand prize winning shutter 37A. That is, on the upper surface of the second big prize opening shutter 37A and the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43, the speed of the game ball moving to the left is effectively reduced by being inclined downward to the right, and these upper surfaces All of the game balls traveling along the direction initially move to the right in the middle of proceeding to the left, and are guided outward from the right end of the second big prize opening shutter 37A. An out port 41A is provided on the lower right side of the second big prize port shutter 37A. As a result, the game balls guided outward from the right end of the second grand prize opening shutter 37 </ b> A are collected through the out port 41. Although not particularly illustrated, the cover member 43 is provided with a front end guide portion 43b and a plurality of convex portions 43d, which also effectively reduce the traveling speed of the game ball. The upper surface 43 a of the cover member 43 and the second big prize opening shutter 37 </ b> A form a suppressing portion 430. As for the second grand prize opening shutter and the cover member, a part of the game balls proceeding along these are guided outward from the right end of the big prize opening shutter, while the remaining games are played. The inclination angle of the upper surface may be set to an appropriate angle so that the sphere is guided outward from the left end of the upper surface of the cover member.

[Effects of gaming machine of second modification]
According to the gaming machine of the second modified example, when the second big prize opening shutter 37A is in the closed state, the game balls are likely to be congested on the upper surface thereof, and more game balls are drawn into the second big prize opening. Since it can be made to stay on the upper surface of the shutter 37A, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for over winning while making interest in the whereabouts of the game ball.

  Further, according to the gaming machine of the second modified example, the round game with the possibility of over winning and the round game without the possibility of over winning with the second big prize opening 37 or the first game in the open state. It can be easily recognized just by confirming the special winning opening 36. In short, for example, opening and closing only the first grand prize opening 36 in the first round of the 1R to 7R makes it difficult to over-win, while opening and closing only the second big prize opening 37 in the second half round of the 8R to 16R. Over winning can be made possible. In such a case, in the big hit gaming state, the time when the first big prize opening shutter 36A is in an open state and over-winning is difficult and the time when the second big prize opening shutter 37A is in an open state and over-winning is possible. For example, in the first half of the jackpot gaming state, you can concentrate on the bonus bonus display, but in the second half of the jackpot gaming state, you can make the game more interesting by generating over-winnings. Can be increased.

<Third Modification of Variable Winning Device>
Next, a third modification of the variable prize device will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. In the following description, unless otherwise indicated, it means the form when the special winning opening is in a closed state. The variable winning device according to the third modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 and the game board 1 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 68 to 79, the third modified example is different from the variable winning device 90 according to the embodiment and the modified example described above. The variable winning device 90 includes a cover member 91 and an opening / closing unit 92 as basic components. The opening / closing unit 92 includes a front base plate 920, a back base member 921, a main stage 922, an upper stage 923, an upper lid 924, a drive unit 925, and the like. On the front portion 922a of the main stage 922, a shutter surface 922b having a slightly downward-sloping tendency is formed as a portion corresponding to the big prize opening shutter. The front base plate 920, the front part 922a of the main stage 922, and the shutter surface 922b are located on the front side of the game board 1, while the back base member 921, the other part of the main stage 922, the upper stage 923, and the upper lid 924. And the drive unit 925 are arranged on the back side of the game board 1.

  The cover member 91 has a front end guide portion 91b and a plurality of convex portions 91d in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment, and has a right upper surface 91a and a left upper surface 91a 'on the right and left sides of the upper portion. Between the right upper surface 91a and the left upper surface 91a ', an opening 91c serving as a big prize opening 37 is formed. An introduction portion 920c, which will be described later, is positioned above the right upper surface 91a, so that the game ball B hardly comes into contact with the upper surface 91a.

  The front base plate 920 is provided in the penetrating portion 1 c provided so as to reach the back surface from the game area 1 p in the game board 1. The front base plate 920 has an opening 920a at the center, and the front portion 922a of the main stage 922 is exposed through the opening 920a and the through portion 1c. In addition, at the center of the right end of the opening 920a, a game ball B guided forward along a step surface 922c of the main stage 922, which will be described later, is placed on the shutter surface 922b in the closed state or the large winning opening 37 in the open state. A dischargeable portion 920b that can be discharged is provided. At the upper right end of the opening 920a, an introduction portion 920c for guiding the flowing game ball B to a guide path 924b of an upper lid 924 described later is provided. Such a front base plate 920 also serves as an accessory part of the game board 1.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the back base member 921 is for supporting the main stage 922, the upper stage 923, and the drive unit 925 on the back side of the game board 1. A main stage 922 is supported on the upper portion of the back base member 921 via a first shaft 921a extending in the left-right direction so as to be tiltable in the front-rear direction. An upper stage 923 is supported via 921b so as to be tiltable in the front-rear direction. The shaft 921a is provided so as to be displaceable by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the main stage 922 is displaced so that the shutter surface 922b is displaced from the position where the big prize opening 37 is closed to the position where it is opened. When tilting, the shaft 921a is displaced from the high position to the low position accordingly. A drive unit 925 is disposed at the bottom of the back base member 921. Further, a recovery port 921c capable of recovering a game ball B guided forward along a step surface 922c of a main stage 922 described later is provided on the left side surface portion of the back base member 921 (see FIG. 75). ). Such a back base member 921 also serves as an accessory part of the game board 1.

  The main stage 922 has a front portion 922a, a shutter surface 922b, and a staircase surface 922c. An upright front portion 922a is formed at the front end of the staircase surface 922c so as to face the cover member 91. A shutter surface 922b is formed at the front portion 922a, and a plurality of contactable with the game ball B is possible. Convex portions 922d are provided at predetermined intervals. The staircase surface 922c is formed in a plurality of steps so as to have a step which becomes lower as it advances from the rear to the front. The step surface 922c of each step is an inclined surface that tends to be slightly lowered downward, and is also an inclined surface that alternately descends to the left, descends to the left, and descends to the right as it progresses from the upper stage to the middle stage to the lower stage. According to such a staircase surface 922c, a passage is formed that guides the game ball B to the left and right while guiding it from the upper stage to the lower stage. When the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the game ball B that has reached the lower stage of the staircase surface 922c is guided to the shutter surface 922b through the discharge portion 920b and is directly recovered through the recovery port 921c. A plurality of convex portions 922e that can come into contact with the game ball B are also provided at predetermined intervals on the step portion of the step surface 922c of each step. Such a main stage 922 can be tilted in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925 as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77. That is, as shown in FIG. 77, when the main stage 922 is in a tilted posture with a forward drop, the staircase surface 922c is also in a relatively steep posture with a forward drop, and the front portion 922a and the shutter surface 922b are formed in the opening 920a. Move down. As a result, the gap between the upper end of the opening 920a and the front part 922a is enlarged, and the plurality of game balls B on the staircase surface 922c are guided to the winning prize opening 37 all at once.

  The upper stage 923 has an upper surface 923 a adjacent to the upper part of the main stage 922 and having a step higher than the uppermost step surface 922 c in the main stage 922. The central portion of the upper surface 923a is an inclined portion that is lower than both ends and forwardly lowered, and the game ball B naturally moves to the staircase surface 922c through this portion. The game ball B is guided to the upper surface 923a of the upper stage 923 through the introduction portion 920c and a guide path 924b of the upper lid 924 described later. When the shutter surface 922b is in a closed state, a plurality of convex portions 923e that can contact the game ball B are provided at a predetermined interval at the front end of the upper stage 923. Such an upper stage 923 can be tilted in the front-rear direction in conjunction with the main stage 922, as shown in FIGS. That is, as shown in FIG. 77, when the upper stage 923 is inclined forward and downward, the upper surface 923a is also inclined forward and relatively steep, and a plurality of game balls B on the upper surface 923a are simultaneously gathered. It will be guided to the staircase surface 922c. The main stage and the upper stage may be integrally formed. Further, the main stage and the upper stage may overlap each other in the opened state.

  The upper lid 924 covers the step surface 922c and the upper stage 923 of the main stage 922, and has a guide path 924b connected to the introduction portion 920c and an inner wall 924c extending in the left-right direction. The guide path 924b is formed so as to guide the game ball B from the introduction portion 920c to the upper surface 923a of the upper stage 923. The inner wall 924c is disposed so as to face each step surface with an interval through which the game ball B can pass between each step surface of the main stage 922. The inner wall 924c is provided with a plurality of convex portions 924e that can contact the game ball B at a predetermined interval. The inner wall 924c, the convex portion 924e, the staircase surface 922c, and the convex portion 922e serve as a passage that suppresses the progression of the game ball B while meandering the game ball B to the left and right along the staircase surface 922c of each step. A portion 930 is formed. Such an upper lid 924 also serves as an accessory part of the game board 1.

  The drive unit 925 tilts the main stage 922, and mainly includes a drive motor 925a, a drive gear 925b, a pair of intermediate gears 925c and 925d, a pair of driven gears 925e and 925f, two push-up pipes 925g and 925h, and Two rotational position sensors 925j and 925k are provided. The driving force of the driving motor 925a is transmitted to the driven gear 925e via the driving gear 925b and the intermediate gears 925c and 925d, and further transmitted to the driven gear 925f meshed with the driven gear 925e. The drive motor 925a and the rotational position sensors 925j, 925k are connected to the main CPU 61 via a control circuit (not shown), and are controlled by the main CPU 61 or supply predetermined signals.

  The driven gears 925e and 925f are formed with cylindrical peripheral walls, and inwardly protruding pieces 9250e that abut on semi-helical cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h formed on the push-up pipes 925g and 925h, respectively. , 9250f are provided. Also, two outward projecting pieces 9251e and 9252e are provided on the peripheral wall of one driven gear 925e so as to be detected by the rotational position sensors 925j and 925k at a predetermined rotational position. The push-up pipes 925g and 925h are inserted into the driven gears 925e and 925f in a state where the push-up pipes 925g and 925h are always urged upward via the springs 925m and 925n. A cam cover 925p is provided above the push-up pipes 925g and 925h, and this cam cover 925p is always in contact with the lower part of the main stage 922. As shown by a solid line in FIG. 78, at the rotational position where the projecting piece 9251e is detected by the rotational position sensor 925k, the projecting pieces 9250e and 9250f abut on the uppermost portions of the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h. The push-up pipes 925g and 925h are maintained at the low position against the urging force of the springs 925m and 925n. As a result, the main stage 922 is in an inclined posture, and the special winning opening 37 is opened. On the other hand, when the driven gears 925e and 925f rotate approximately 180 degrees in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 78, the projecting piece 9252e comes to the rotational position detected by the rotational position sensor 925j as indicated by the phantom line in FIG. In this state, the projecting pieces 9250e and 9250f are in contact with the lowermost portions of the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h, so that the push-up pipes 925g and 925h are maintained at a high position as shown in FIG. Thereby, the main stage 922 becomes a non-inclined posture, and the special winning opening 37 is closed. Further, when the special winning opening 37 is closed and then opened again, the driven gears 925e and 925f rotate approximately 180 degrees in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 78, so that the projecting pieces 9250e and 9250f are The cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h are rotated while pressing down the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h while being in contact with the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h. As a result, the state as shown in FIG. 77 is obtained again, and the special winning opening 37 is opened. That is, the main stage 922 is inclined and non-inclined every time the driven gears 925e and 925f are rotated approximately 180 degrees in one direction, and the special winning opening 37 is opened and closed accordingly.

[Effects of gaming machine of third modification]
According to the gaming machine of the third modified example as described above, the game ball B is guided to the suppressing portion 930 and its traveling speed is effectively reduced without operating other members other than tilting the main stage 922. A plurality of game balls B suppressed by the suppression unit 930 as the shutter surface 922b is opened can be guided to the big prize opening 37 all at once. As a result, the number of passes of the game ball B with respect to the grand prize opening 37 can be adjusted without separately providing a storage device, etc., and the increase in the number of parts and cost increase can be suppressed, and the heat problem around the game board can be solved can do.

  In addition, the game ball B rolling in the game area 1p is caused to flow into the suppression portion 930 through the introduction portion 920c and the guide path 924b without directly colliding with the shutter surface 922b. Since the game ball B can be smoothly guided from the rear end portion to the front end portion on the lower stage side without any hindrance, damage to the shutter surface 922b can be prevented.

  Further, also on the staircase surface 922c in the suppressing portion 930, the traveling speed of the game ball B can be effectively decelerated and suppressed by the meandering passage and the convex portions 922e, 923e, and 924e, and the progress can be further delayed. it can.

  In addition, since the game ball B can be guided from the game area 1p on the front side of the game board 1 to the back side suppression unit 930, a sufficient distance for slowing and suppressing the traveling speed of the game ball B is ensured. be able to.

  Further, in the restraining portion 930, a plurality of convex portions 922e, 923e, and 924e can form a passage capable of effectively restraining the progress of the game ball B, and a plurality of games are caused by the staircase surface 922c that tends to move downward. The balls B can be guided to the big winning opening 37 all at once, and an over winning can be easily realized.

  In addition, not all of the game balls B whose progress is suppressed by the suppression unit 930 are guided to the winning prize opening 37, and a part thereof is led out of the gaming area 1p through the collection opening 920c. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from passing excessively with respect to 37.

<Fourth Modification of Variable Winning Device>
Next, the 4th modification of a variable prize-winning apparatus is demonstrated using FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those of the third modification described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. The variable winning device according to the fourth modification mainly differs from the one according to the third modification in the main stage 922. The variable winning device according to the fourth modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 and the game board 1 shown in FIG.

  In the main stage 922 of the fourth modified example, the shutter surface 922b is formed on the front portion 922a, but the convex portion is not provided. Of course, you may make it provide a convex part. Moreover, the convex part is not provided also in the level | step-difference part of the upper cover 924 and the staircase surface 922c which are not shown in figure as a whole. The staircase surface 922c of each step is an inclined surface with a slight downward tendency, and is formed so as to exhibit an uneven or wavy repetitive shape along the left-right direction. The upper surface 923a of the upper stage 923 is also formed in a concavo-convex shape or a wave shape like the step surface 922c. According to the staircase surface 922c and the upper surface 923a, the game ball B easily swings in the left-right direction when proceeding from the upper stage to the lower stage, so that the time until the lower stage is reached is prolonged. The traveling speed of the game ball B can be reduced more effectively.

  As shown by a solid line in FIG. 82, when the shutter surface 922b is in a closed state, the game ball B that has reached the lower stage of the step surface 922c is guided onto the shutter surface 922b through a discharge unit 920b (not shown). An inclined support surface 922f is provided on the bottom of the main stage 922, and a slide plate 926 that can reciprocate in the front-rear direction is in contact with the inclined support surface 922f. The slide plate 926 supports the bottom of the main stage 922. The slide plate 926 is moved in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925 (not shown).

  That is, as indicated by phantom lines in FIG. 82, when the slide plate 926 is retracted to a predetermined rear position while contacting the inclined support surface 922f, the main stage 922 is inclined in a forward-downward direction. As a result, the staircase surface 922c also has a relatively steep attitude that is lowered forward, and the front portion 922a and the shutter surface 922b move below an opening 920a (not shown). As a result, the plurality of game balls B on the staircase surface 922c are guided to the winning prize opening 37 all at once. As the mechanism for tilting the main stage, a mechanism similar to that of the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above may be applied.

[Effects of Game Machine of Fourth Modification]
According to the gaming machine of the fourth modified example as described above, it is possible to configure a variable winning device capable of over-winning with simpler parts and structure, and to effectively suppress the increase in the number of parts and the manufacturing cost. it can.

<Another example of the fourth modification>
Next, a variable winning device according to another example of the fourth modification will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the fourth modification described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. 83 is a plan view showing the main stage 922, FIG. 84 is a plan view showing the upper unit 924 ′, and FIG. 85 is a diagram for schematically explaining the opening / closing operation of the main stage 922. . 83 and 84 show a form in which the component parts (main stage 922, upper unit 924 ′) of the variable winning device are provided in the through-hole 1c of the game board 1 without any gaps. Actually, the components of the variable winning device are provided in the through portion 1c of the game board 1 with a certain gap.

  A main stage 922 shown in FIG. 83 is formed integrally with the upper stage. The main stage 922 is also formed in a concavo-convex shape or a wavy shape along the left-right direction, and has a staircase surface 922c composed of an inclined surface that tends to slightly fall downward. A shutter surface 922b is formed integrally with the front end (front portion) 922a of the staircase surface 922c. The step surface 922c and the shutter surface 922b are formed to have the same dimension in the left-right direction. The upper unit 924 ′ shown in FIG. 84 is similar to the above-described upper lid 924, but does not have a plate-like member that faces the entire surface of the stepped surface 922c in the closed state, and extends from the introduction portion 920c to the rear of the main stage 922. A guide path 924b is provided for guiding the game ball B to the upper stage of the staircase surface 922c. The rear end portion 924f of the guide path 924b is disposed above the rear end of the main stage 922, and a communication space portion 924g leading to the rear end of the main stage 922 is opened further rearward of the rear end portion 924f. Yes. Thereby, the game ball B guided to the rear end portion 924f of the guide path 924b falls to the rear end portion of the main stage 922 through the communication space portion 924g. Even when the main stage 922 is not only in the open state but also in the closed state between the front end 922a of the step surface 922c and the upper end of the opening 920a (not shown), a game is played from the step surface 922c through the front end 922a to the shutter surface 922b. A relatively large gap through which the sphere B can pass is provided. Thereby, even if the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the game ball B can be smoothly guided from the step surface 922c of the suppressing unit 930 to the shutter surface 922b without any trouble.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (A), when the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the game ball B in the suppressing unit 930 passes through the opening 920a (not shown) from the upper stage to the lower stage along the step surface 922c, and finally To the shutter surface 922b. Such a main stage 922 is tilted by a mechanism similar to that of the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above. In addition, as a device for tilting the main stage, for example, another drive unit using a solenoid may be used.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), when the main stage 922 is in a tilted position with a forward drop, the staircase surface 922c also has a relatively steep tilt with a forward drop, and the shutter face 922b has an opening (not shown). Move down 920a. As a result, the plurality of game balls B on the staircase surface 922c are guided to the winning prize opening 37 all at once. Even with such a variable prize device including the main stage 922 and the upper unit 924 ′, the same effect as that of the fourth modified example described above can be obtained.

<Fifth Modification of Variable Winning Device>
Next, a fifth modified example of the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the component which is the same as or similar to the thing by the 3rd modification mentioned above or a 4th modification, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. The variable winning device according to the fifth modification is also mainly different from that according to the third modification in the main stage 922. The variable winning device according to the fifth modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 and the game board 1 shown in FIG.

  The main stage 922 of the fifth modified example is formed up to the portion of the upper stage, and has an inclined surface 922c 'that tends to be lowered downward. Nothing is provided on the inclined surface 922c '. The upper lid 924 has a plurality of partition walls 924c 'on the surface facing the inclined surface 922c'. When the main stage 922 is in a posture to close the grand prize opening 37, the cut wall 924c ′ is bent to the left and right to meander when the game ball B moves from the upper side to the lower side along the inclined surface 922c ′. The passage 930 ′ is formed. The partition wall 924c 'is provided with a plurality of convex portions 924e that can contact the game ball B at a predetermined interval. When the game ball B moves downward along the inclined surface 922c ′ by the passage 930 ′ having such a convex portion 924e, a suppressing portion for reducing and suppressing the traveling speed by meandering left and right Is formed. That is, the game ball B meanders to the left and right when the path 930 ′ is bent left and right, so that it takes a long time to reach the lower end of the inclined surface 922c ′. The traveling speed of B can be reduced more effectively.

  As shown by a solid line in FIG. 87, when the shutter surface 922b is in a closed state, the game ball B that has reached the lower end of the inclined surface 922c 'is guided onto the shutter surface 922b through a discharge unit 920b (not shown). The bottom of the main stage 922 is also provided with an inclined support surface 922f, and a slide plate 926 that can reciprocate in the front-rear direction is in contact with the inclined support surface 922f. The slide plate 926 supports the bottom of the main stage 922. The slide plate 926 is moved in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925 (not shown).

  That is, as indicated by phantom lines in FIG. 87, when the slide plate 926 is retracted to a predetermined position behind the inclined support surface 922f, the main stage 922 is inclined in a forward-downward direction. Then, the front surface 922a and the shutter surface 922b move below an opening 920a (not shown) while the inclined surface 922c 'is in a steeper posture with the front lowering. At this time, the interval between the inclined surface 922 c ′ and the partition wall 924 c ′ increases beyond the diameter of the game ball B, and the partition wall 924 c ′ cannot prevent the progress of the game ball B. As a result, the bent passage 930 ′ is eliminated, and the plurality of game balls B on the inclined surface 922 c ′ are promptly guided to the special winning opening 37 without any trouble.

[Effects of Game Machine of Fifth Modification]
Even with the gaming machine of the fifth modified example, it is possible to configure a variable winning device capable of over-winning with simpler parts and structure, and to effectively suppress the increase in the number of parts and the manufacturing cost. .

<Another example of the fifth modification>
Next, a variable winning device according to another example of the fifth modification will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the fifth modification described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. FIG. 88 is a plan view showing the main stage 922, FIG. 84 is a plan view showing the upper unit 924 ′, and FIG. 85 is a diagram for schematically explaining the opening / closing operation of the main stage 922. . 88 and 89 show a configuration in which the component parts (main stage 922, upper unit 924 ′) of the variable winning device are provided in the through-hole 1c of the game board 1 without a gap. Actually, the components of the variable winning device are provided in the through portion 1c of the game board 1 with a certain gap.

  The main stage 922 shown in FIG. 88 is a member formed in a flat plate shape in substantially the same manner as in the fifth modification described above, and its upper surface is disposed as a forwardly inclined surface 922c ′, and the inclined surface 922c ′ The tip portion is used as the shutter surface 922b. The upper unit 924 ′ shown in FIG. 89 also does not have a plate-like member facing the entire surface of the inclined surface 922c ′, wraps around the rear end of the main stage 922 from the introduction portion 920c, and is an appropriate upper end portion of the inclined surface 922c ′. A guide path 924b for guiding the game ball B to the right is provided. Further, the upper unit 924 ′ has a plurality of partition walls 924 c ′ at a portion facing the inclined surface 922 c ′. When the main stage 922 is in a closed state, the cut wall 924c ′ forms a passage 930 ′ that is bent left and right to meander when the game ball B moves along the inclined surface 922c ′ from above to below. ing. The partition wall 924c 'is provided with a plurality of convex portions 924e that can contact the game ball B at a predetermined interval. By such a passage 930 ′, a suppressing portion is formed that guides the game ball B in a meandering manner to the lower side along the inclined surface 922 c ′ while decelerating and suppressing the traveling speed. Between the outlet 930a ′ of the passage 930 ′ and the upper end of the opening 920a (not shown), the main stage 922 is guided not only to the open state but also to the front end side of the inclined surface 922c ′. A relatively large gap through which the game ball B can pass is provided. Accordingly, even when the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the game ball B can be smoothly guided along the passage 930 'from the inclined surface 922c' to the shutter surface 922b without any trouble.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (A), when the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the game ball B on the inclined surface 922c ′ moves so as to meander from the upper side to the lower side along the passage 930 ′. Specifically, the light passes through an opening 920a (not shown) and is guided onto the shutter surface 922b. Such a main stage 922 is tilted by a mechanism similar to that of the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above. The main stage 922 is supported by a shaft 921a inserted into the vertically long hole 921d of the back base member 921 at the rear end thereof, and can be tilted by rotating around the shaft 921a. In addition, as a device for tilting the main stage, for example, another drive unit using a solenoid may be used.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 90B, when the central portion of the main stage 922 is lowered by the drive unit 925, the main stage 922 is relatively tilted around the shaft 921a that is displaced downward along the vertically long hole 921d. It becomes a steep posture with a steep forward decline. That is, the inclined surface 922 c ′ also has a posture that is steeper than in the state of FIG. 90A, and the shutter surface 922 b moves below an opening 920 a (not shown). As a result, the plurality of game balls B on the inclined surface 922c ′ are separated from the partition wall 924c ′, and the passage 930 ′ is eliminated, so that the plurality of game balls B are enlarged all at once along the inclined surface 922c ′. It will be led to the winning opening 37. Even with such a variable winning device including the main stage 922 and the upper unit 924 ', it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the fifth modified example.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, the big prize opening shutter or shutter surface protrudes / retracts in the front / rear direction, tilts in the front / rear direction, and slides in the left / right direction to open / close the big prize opening or around the vertical axis. The prize winning opening can be opened and closed by turning, or the two prize winning shutters can be arranged in parallel, and the distance between the two prize winning shutters can be increased when opened to open and close the prize winning opening. May be.

  The surface shape of the prize winning shutter or the shutter surface may be a serrated rough surface, an uneven surface, a wavy surface, or a shape in which a plurality of convex portions are discretely arranged on the entire surface. According to this, the traveling speed of the game ball can be decelerated more effectively.

  In the above-described embodiment, the special winning opening has a characteristic configuration. For example, the above-described large winning opening shutter or the same shutter surface is applied to a blade member as an ordinary electric accessory, and the start opening is overloaded. You may make it possible to make a winning and control corresponding to this.

  Regarding the traveling speed of the game ball expressed in the description of the above embodiment, “decelerate” means that the game ball also stops.

  As another example of the third to fifth modifications, the entire area covered with the members constituting the stage (the upper stage, the main stage, etc.) may be used as the big prize opening.

  In the case where a plurality of large winning openings are provided, the prescribed number of winnings may be different for each large winning opening or the number of winning balls may be different. For example, as another example of the second modified example, for the first grand prize opening, the prescribed number of winnings per round is five, the number of winning balls per winning is five, etc. For example, the prescribed number of winnings per round may be 10 and the number of winning balls per winning may be 15 or the like.

  When winning a prize exceeding the prescribed number of winnings by Interpal during the round, for example, the following opening / closing pattern in which the estimated number of winnings at the first opening and the estimated number of winnings at the opening after closing during the round are changed May be provided. Specifically, when the number of specified winnings per round is 10, an opening / closing pattern in which the estimated number of winnings is 8 at the first opening and the estimated number of winnings is 4 at the opening, and the first opening An opening / closing pattern may be provided in which the estimated number of winnings is sometimes six and the estimated number of winnings is six at the time of later opening. According to such an opening / closing pattern, it is possible to realize specifications in which the number of over winnings is the same but the over winning process itself is different.

  In addition, the launch timing at which the number of winnings can be expected may be notified every time when the big winning opening is closed before the round game is executed. Thereby, even if the launch operation is stopped in the middle of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the over-winning cannot be realized.

  In addition, regarding the notification of the scheduled grant quantity, when a plurality of big prize winning openings are opened in one big hit gaming state, the number corresponding to each big winning prize may be notified. For example, the total number of scheduled grants is “2500”, the planned number of winning balls based on winning in the first grand prize opening is “1500”, and the number of scheduled winning balls based on winning in the second big winning opening When the number is “1000”, a notification is made so that the scheduled number of winning balls for the first winning prize opening is displayed as “1500” and the scheduled number of winning balls for the second winning prize opening is displayed as “1000”. Can do.

  As a modified example of the small hit probability, for example, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may have a higher probability than the other. In this case, the one with a low probability of winning includes those that do not win the winning (0% winning probability). In addition, for those who have a high probability of winning a small hit, there is no possibility of not winning a small hit, and it may be a probability that all winnings other than the big win will be won. For example, when the update range of the random number for hit determination is 0 to 255, the big hit probability may be 1/256 and the small hit probability may be 255/256.

  As a modified example of the lottery related to the opening of the second start opening (ordinary symbol game lottery), a game ball is detected by a passing gate switch in one or both of a non-short game state and a short-time game state Even if it opens, you may make it determine any one of whether to open uniquely, without performing the lottery which concerns on the opening. For example, in the non-short-time gaming state, it may be always unopened without lottery, and in the short-time gaming state, it may be always opened without lottery. If only one of the non-short-time gaming state and the short-time gaming state is selected as a non-lottery game, and the person corresponding to the non-lottery is in the non-short-time gaming state, it will be released by lottery. In the case where the person corresponding to the no lottery is in the short-time gaming state, a case where the lottery is not released in the non-short-time gaming state may be provided. That is, it is only necessary that the time-short gaming state has a higher probability of opening than the non-time-short gaming state. Moreover, about the opening pattern of a blade member, two or more types, such as opening for 1 second x 1 time, opening for 2 seconds x 2 times, etc., are provided. You may make it perform a lottery about which open pattern to use.

  When the variation example of the lottery relating to the small hit probability and the opening of the second start port described above is applied to each of the above-described embodiments, for example, if there are two prescribed winning numbers in the small hit, before the big winning port is opened With the interval between rounds or the interval between rounds between the opening of the big prize opening, it is possible to realize three or more over-winnings exceeding the prescribed number of winnings even in a small hit. For example, the big hit probability of the second special symbol is 1/256, the small hit probability is 255/256, and in the non-short game state, the lottery is not released and in the short-time game state, it is opened in the no lottery. In such a case, in the short-time gaming state, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by small hits, and the game performance can be further developed. In addition, when the big hit probability of the first special symbol is 1/256, the small hit probability is 1/256, and the probability of losing is 254/256, the interval between rounds before the big winning opening is opened or between the opening of the big winning opening With an interval during the round, it is possible to win three or more over-winnings that exceed the prescribed number of winnings even with small hits that are infrequent.

  As a display related to the big winning opening shutter and winning a prize, for example, by providing a ball detection sensor near the left end and near the right end, the expected winning number per round and the actual winning number are notified by a bar graph-like meter display or numerical display. You may make it do. For example, during a predetermined period until the big winning opening is opened, when a game ball is detected by the right-side ball detection sensor, the expected winning number is added and updated by meter display or numerical display, while the left-side ball detection is detected. When the game ball is detected by the sensor, the expected number of winnings is subtracted and updated by meter display or numerical display, and when the big winning opening is opened, the updated numerical value is presented according to the numerical value. For example, a display mode such as “maximum winning!”, “Medium winning!”, Or “small winning” may be performed.

  A single winning prize opening may be provided with a plurality of stage members (upper stage, main stage, etc.).

  The special winning opening may be provided with a specific area therein, and when a game ball passes through the specific area in the big hit gaming state, it may be shifted to the probability changing gaming state.

  As a gaming machine, it can also be applied to a gaming machine including a pachislot machine, a roulette machine, or a slot machine.

  Needless to say, those according to the above-described embodiments and modifications can be combined as appropriate.

  Based on the above embodiment or modification, the basic configuration of the present invention is listed below.

(Appendix A1)
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) in which a game medium (game ball) can roll;
A passing area (big prize opening 37) provided in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Displaceable members (large winning opening shutter 37A, main stage 922) that are displaceable in a first mode (open state) that facilitates passage of the game medium with respect to the passing region and a second mode (closed state) that becomes difficult. And comprising
The displacement member has a restraining portion (a restraining portion 430, 930) capable of restraining advancing speed of the flowed game medium,
The suppressor is
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the displacement member is located at a first position (open position) where the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member can be suppressed.
When the displacement member is in the first mode, it is located at a second position (closed position) that suppresses the traveling speed of the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member more than when it is located at the first position. To play.
(Appendix A2)
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the suppressing portion includes a lower portion as it proceeds from one end portion to the other end portion, and a support surface that supports the game medium from below (the large winning opening shutter 37A). Upper surface, step surface 922c of main stage 922, inclined surface 922c ′)
The passage region is formed at least below the other end of the support surface,
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein a guide path (second guide rail 30 ', guide path 924b) capable of guiding the game medium is formed at one end portion of the support surface in the suppression unit.
(Appendix A3)
The game board has a penetrating part (penetrating part 1c) reaching the back surface from the gaming area,
The displacement member is disposed in the penetrating portion so that at least a part of the suppressing portion is located on the back side of the gaming area,
The gaming machine according to appendix A1 or A2, further comprising an introduction part (introduction part 920c) for guiding game media in the game area to the suppression part located on the back side of the game area.
(Appendix A4)
The suppressing portion is formed in a concavo-convex shape along a first horizontal direction (left-right direction) and is formed in a step shape along a second horizontal direction (front-rear direction) intersecting the first horizontal direction. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, characterized in that:
(Appendix A5)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium into the game area;
A start passage region (first start port 32, second start port 33) that is provided separately from the pass region in the game region and through which game media can pass;
Game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that a game medium has passed through the passing area;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (such as a big hit game state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start passage area;
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to a specific game state on the condition that a determination result indicating the transition to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means;
Advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing at least one advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a specified number (specified number of winnings) of game media has passed through the passing area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media;
In the specific game state, the advantageous game execution means is configured to determine a time (interval between rounds) in which the displacement member is in the second mode before executing the advantageous game, and a specific number of game media are output by the emission means. Can be controlled to be a specific time to be launched and flow into the displacement member,
When the displacement member becomes the first mode after the lapse of the specific time, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage region, whereby the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game is defined. Can be more than a few,
In the specific gaming state, the number of game values given (the number of prize balls) given by the game value granting means per game medium that has passed through the passing area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means Based on the number of executions (number of rounds) and the planned number of game media that can pass through the passing area according to the specific time (estimated number of winnings), the planned amount of game value (scheduled) in the specific gaming state A planned grant quantity determining means (sub CPU 71) for determining (the number of winning balls);
An informing means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of informing at least a part of the planned provision quantity determined by the planned provision quantity determination means, comprising any one of appendices A1 to A4, Gaming machine.
(Appendix A6)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium into the game area;
A start passage region (first start port 32, second start port 33) that is provided separately from the pass region in the game region and through which game media can pass;
Game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that a game medium has passed through the passing area;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (such as a big hit game state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start passage area;
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to a specific game state on the condition that a determination result indicating the transition to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means;
Advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing at least one advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a specified number (specified number of winnings) of game media has passed through the passing area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media;
The advantageous game executing means has a time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the prescribed number, to be launched by the launching means and pass through the second passage area during execution of the advantageous game. After the displacement member is set to the first mode over the first time (the first opening time in the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time (in the round) in the second mode. The time of the interval) is controllable so that the second number of game media whose sum with the first number exceeds the prescribed number is fired by the launching means and flows into the displacement member,
When the displacement member becomes the first mode after the second time has elapsed, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage region, so that the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game is It is possible to exceed the prescribed number,
In the specific gaming state, the number of game values given (the number of prize balls) given by the game value granting means per game medium that has passed through the passing area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means The game value in a specific gaming state based on the number of executions (number of rounds) and the planned number of passes (estimated number of winnings) of game media that can pass through the passing area according to the first time and the second time Scheduled grant quantity determining means (sub CPU 71) for determining the scheduled grant quantity (scheduled number of winning balls),
An informing means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of informing at least a part of the planned provision quantity determined by the planned provision quantity determination means, comprising any one of appendices A1 to A4, Gaming machine.

(Appendix B1)
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) in which a game medium (game ball) can roll;
A passing area (big prize opening 37) provided in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
A displacement member (main stage 922) that is displaceable between a first mode that facilitates passage of the game medium with respect to the passing region and a second mode that is difficult;
When the displacement member is in the first aspect, the displacement member can be positioned in the first position, and when the displacement member is in the second aspect, the displacement member is A passage forming member (upper lid 924, upper unit 924 ') that can be located at two positions,
The passage forming member is
When located in the second position, it is possible to form a passage (passage 930) capable of suppressing the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member together with the displacement member,
When positioned at the first position, by not forming at least a part of the passage together with the displacement member, the progression speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is not suppressed as compared with when positioned at the second position. Is possible and
A gaming machine characterized in that when at least a part of the passage is not formed, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member can be guided to the passage area.
(Appendix B2)
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the displacement member includes a lower portion as it proceeds from one end to the other end, and a support surface (an inclined surface 922c ′ of the main stage 922) that supports the game medium from below. Have
The passage region is formed at least below the other end of the support surface,
The passage is formed by the support surface and the passage forming member,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the game medium can roll along the passage from one end of the support surface to the other end.
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein when the displacement member is in the first aspect, the game medium can roll from one end of the support surface to the other end without following the passage. .
(Appendix B3)
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the game medium that rolls along the passage includes a discharge port (recovery port 921c) that can be discharged out of the passage before being guided to the passage region. The gaming machine according to appendix B2, characterized by that.
(Appendix B4)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium into the game area;
A start passage region (first start port 32, second start port 33) that is provided separately from the pass region in the game region and through which game media can pass;
Game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that a game medium has passed through the passing area;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (such as a big hit game state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start passage area;
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to a specific game state on the condition that a determination result indicating the transition to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means;
Advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing at least one advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a specified number (specified number of winnings) of game media has passed through the passing area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media;
In the specific game state, the advantageous game execution means is configured to determine a time (interval between rounds) in which the displacement member is in the second mode before executing the advantageous game, and a specific number of game media are output by the emission means. Can be controlled to be a specific time to be launched and flow into the displacement member,
When the displacement member becomes the first mode after the lapse of the specific time, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage region, whereby the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game is defined. Can be more than a few,
In the specific gaming state, the number of game values given (the number of prize balls) given by the game value granting means per game medium that has passed through the passing area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means Based on the number of executions (number of rounds) and the planned number of game media that can pass through the passing area according to the specific time (estimated number of winnings), the planned amount of game value (scheduled) in the specific gaming state A planned grant quantity determining means (sub CPU 71) for determining (the number of winning balls);
An informing means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of informing at least a part of the planned provision quantity determined by the planned provision quantity determination means, comprising any one of the supplementary notes B1 to B3 Gaming machine.
(Appendix B5)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of launching a game medium into the game area;
A start passage region (first start port 32, second start port 33) that is provided separately from the pass region in the game region and through which game media can pass;
Game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that a game medium has passed through the passing area;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (such as a big hit game state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start passage area;
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to a specific game state on the condition that a determination result indicating the transition to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means;
Advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing at least one advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a specified number (specified number of winnings) of game media has passed through the passing area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media;
The advantageous game executing means has a time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the prescribed number, to be launched by the launching means and pass through the second passage area during execution of the advantageous game. After the displacement member is set to the first mode over the first time (the first opening time in the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time (in the round) in the second mode. The time of the interval) is controllable so that the second number of game media whose sum with the first number exceeds the prescribed number is fired by the launching means and flows into the displacement member,
When the displacement member becomes the first mode after the second time has elapsed, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage region, so that the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game is It is possible to exceed the prescribed number,
In the specific gaming state, the number of game values given (the number of prize balls) given by the game value granting means per game medium that has passed through the passing area, and the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game executing means The game value in a specific gaming state based on the number of executions (number of rounds) and the planned number of passes (estimated number of winnings) of game media that can pass through the passing area according to the first time and the second time Scheduled grant quantity determining means (sub CPU 71) for determining the scheduled grant quantity (scheduled number of winning balls),
An informing means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of informing at least a part of the planned provision quantity determined by the planned provision quantity determination means, comprising any one of the supplementary notes B1 to B3 Gaming machine.

(Appendix C1)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of firing a game medium (game ball);
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) in which the game medium launched by the launch means can roll;
A first passage area (first start port 32, second start port 33) that is provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A second passage area (a big prize opening 37, a second big prize opening 37) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass;
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that the game medium has passed through the second passing area;
Displaceable members (large winning opening shutter 37A, second) displaceable in a first mode (open state) that facilitates passage of the game medium with respect to the second passing region and a second mode (closed state) that becomes difficult. Grand prize opening shutter 37A),
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the progress speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first mode, the game medium flowing into the displacement member is advanced. A suppressing portion (suppressing portion 430) that does not suppress the speed as compared with the case where the displacement member is in the second mode;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (such as a big hit game state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passing area; ,
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to a specific game state on the condition that a determination result indicating the transition to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means;
Advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing at least one advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a prescribed number (a prescribed number of winnings) of game media has passed through the second passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media,
The advantageous game execution means has a number of game media exceeding the specified number of specific times (interval between rounds) in which the displacement member is in the second mode before executing the advantageous game in the specific game state. Is controlled so that it is time to be fired by the launching means and to flow into the displacement member.
(Appendix C2)
A third passage area (first grand prize opening 36) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A variable member (first big prize opening shutter 36A) that can be changed between a first mode in which the game medium can easily pass through the third passing region and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to pass,
The game value giving means can give a game value on condition that a game medium has passed through the third passage area,
The advantageous game execution means includes:
First advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one first advantageous game for displacing the variable member to the first mode in the specific game state;
Second advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one second advantageous game for displacing the displacement member into the first mode in the specific game state;
In the specific game state, after executing one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game, the other can be executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means ends on condition that a prescribed number of game media have passed through the third passing area.
(Appendix C3)
The specific gaming state is
A first specific gaming state in which the specific time before the execution of at least one advantageous game is the first specific time;
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, further comprising: a second specific gaming state in which the specific time before execution of at least one advantageous game is a second specific time longer than the first specific time.
(Appendix C4)
In the specific gaming state, the number of game values given (the number of prize balls) given by the game value giving means per one of the game media that have passed through the second passing area, and the advantageous game executing means Based on the number of times that the advantageous game has been executed (number of rounds) and the scheduled number of games media that can pass through the second passing area according to the specific time (estimated number of winnings), the game value schedule in the specific game state Planned grant quantity determining means (sub CPU 71) for determining the grant quantity (planned number of winning balls);
The gaming machine according to appendix C3, further comprising notification means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the scheduled grant quantity determined by the scheduled grant quantity determining means.

(Appendix D1)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of firing a game medium (game ball);
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) in which the game medium launched by the launch means can roll;
A first passage area (first start port 32, second start port 33) that is provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A second passage area (a big prize opening 37, a second big prize opening 37) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass;
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value (game ball) on condition that the game medium has passed through the second passing area;
Displaceable members (large winning opening shutter 37A, second) displaceable in a first mode (open state) that facilitates passage of the game medium with respect to the second passing region and a second mode (closed state) that becomes difficult. Grand prize opening shutter 37A),
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the progress speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first mode, the game medium flowing into the displacement member is advanced. A suppressing portion (suppressing portion 430) that does not suppress the speed as compared with the case where the displacement member is in the second mode;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (such as a big hit game state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passing area; ,
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to a specific game state on the condition that a determination result indicating the transition to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means;
Advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing at least one advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a prescribed number (a prescribed number of winnings) of game media has passed through the second passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media,
The advantageous game executing means has a time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the prescribed number, to be launched by the launching means and pass through the second passage area during execution of the advantageous game. After the displacement member is set to the first mode over the first time (the first opening time in the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time (in the round) in the second mode. Interval time) is controllable so that the second number of game media whose sum with the first number exceeds the prescribed number is fired by the launching means and flows into the displacement member. A gaming machine characterized by
(Appendix D2)
A third passage area (first grand prize opening 36) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A variable member (first big prize opening shutter 36A) that can be changed between a first mode in which the game medium can easily pass through the third passing region and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to pass,
The game value giving means can give a game value on condition that a game medium has passed through the third passage area,
The advantageous game execution means includes:
First advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one first advantageous game for displacing the variable member to the first mode in the specific game state;
Second advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one second advantageous game for displacing the displacement member into the first mode in the specific game state;
In the specific game state, after executing one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game, the other can be executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means is terminated on condition that a prescribed number of game media have passed through the third passing area.
(Appendix D3)
The specific gaming state is
A first specific gaming state in which the second time in at least one advantageous game is a predetermined time;
The gaming machine according to appendix D1, further comprising: a second specific gaming state in which the second time in at least one advantageous game is longer than the predetermined time.
(Appendix D4)
The specific gaming state is
In at least one advantageous game, after the displacement member is changed to the first mode over the first time, the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time in the second mode is determined. The second number of game media can be controlled so as to have a time to be fired by the launching means and flow into the displacement member, and the displacement member before executing at least one advantageous game is the first time. It includes a specific game state in which the time in two modes is controllable so as to be a time during which a number of game media exceeding the prescribed number is fired by the launching means and flows into the displacement member. The gaming machine according to appendix D1 or D3.
(Appendix D5)
In the specific gaming state, the number of game values given (the number of prize balls) given by the game value giving means per one of the game media that have passed through the second passing area, and the advantageous game executing means Based on the number of executions (rounds) of advantageous games and the expected number of game media that can pass through the second passage area according to the first time and the second time (estimated number of winnings) Scheduled grant quantity determining means (sub CPU 71) for determining the scheduled grant quantity (scheduled prize ball number) of game value in the state;
The gaming machine according to appendix D3, further comprising notification means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the planned provision quantity determined by the planned provision quantity determination means.

(Appendix E1)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of firing a game medium (game ball);
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) in which the game medium launched by the launch means can roll;
A first passage area (first start port 32, second start port 33) that is provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A second passage area (a big prize opening 37, a second big prize opening 37) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass;
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value on the condition that the game medium has passed through the second passing area;
Displaceable members (large winning opening shutter 37A, second) displaceable in a first mode (open state) that facilitates passage of the game medium with respect to the second passing region and a second mode (closed state) that becomes difficult. Grand prize opening shutter 37A),
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the progress speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first mode, the game medium flowing into the displacement member is advanced. A suppressing portion (suppressing portion 430) that does not suppress the speed as compared with the case where the displacement member is in the second mode;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (such as a big hit game state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passing area; ,
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to a specific game state on the condition that a determination result indicating the transition to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means;
Advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing at least one advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a prescribed number (a prescribed number of winnings) of game media has passed through the second passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media,
In the specific game state, the advantageous game execution means is configured to determine a time (interval between rounds) in which the displacement member is in the second mode before executing the advantageous game, and a specific number of game media are output by the emission means. Can be controlled to be a specific time to be launched and flow into the displacement member,
When the displacement member becomes the first mode after the lapse of the specific time, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the second passage region, thereby passing the second passage region in the advantageous game. The number can be greater than or equal to the prescribed number,
In the specific gaming state, the number of game values given (the number of prize balls) given by the game value giving means per one of the game media that have passed through the second passing area, and the advantageous game executing means Based on the number of times that the advantageous game has been executed (number of rounds) and the scheduled number of games media that can pass through the second passing area according to the specific time (estimated number of winnings), the game value schedule in the specific game state Planned grant quantity determining means (sub CPU 71) for determining the grant quantity (planned number of winning balls);
A gaming machine comprising: notifying means (liquid crystal display device 4) capable of notifying at least a part of the scheduled assigned quantity determined by the scheduled assigned quantity determining means.
(Appendix E2)
Launching means (launching device 26) capable of firing a game medium (game ball);
A game board (game board 1) having a game area (game area 1p) in which the game medium launched by the launch means can roll;
A first passage area (first start port 32, second start port 33) that is provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A second passage area (a big prize opening 37, a second big prize opening 37) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass;
A game value giving means (payout device 83) capable of giving a game value on the condition that the game medium has passed through the second passing area;
Displaceable members (large winning opening shutter 37A, second) displaceable in a first mode (open state) that facilitates passage of the game medium with respect to the second passing region and a second mode (closed state) that becomes difficult. Grand prize opening shutter 37A),
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the progress speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is suppressed, and when the displacement member is in the first mode, the game medium flowing into the displacement member is advanced. A suppressing portion (suppressing portion 430) that does not suppress the speed as compared with the case where the displacement member is in the second mode;
Specific game state transition determining means (main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (such as a big hit game state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passing area; ,
Specific game state control means (main CPU 61) that can be controlled to a specific game state on the condition that a determination result indicating the transition to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means;
Advantageous game execution means (main CPU 61) capable of executing at least one advantageous game (round game or the like) for displacing the displacement member to the first mode in the specific game state,
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a prescribed number (a prescribed number of winnings) of game media has passed through the second passage area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media,
The advantageous game executing means has a time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the prescribed number, to be launched by the launching means and pass through the second passage area during execution of the advantageous game. After the displacement member is set to the first mode over the first time (the first opening time in the round), the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time (in the round) in the second mode. The time of the interval) is controllable so that the second number of game media whose sum with the first number exceeds the prescribed number is fired by the launching means and flows into the displacement member,
When the displacement member becomes the first mode after the second time has elapsed, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage region, so that the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game is It is possible to exceed the prescribed number,
In the specific game state, the number of game values given by the game value grant means per one of the game media that have passed through the passage area, and the number of executions of advantageous games executed by the advantageous game execution means, A scheduled grant quantity determining means for determining a scheduled grant quantity of a game value in a specific gaming state based on a scheduled number of game media that can pass through the passing area according to the first time and the second time;
A gaming machine comprising: an informing means capable of informing at least a part of the planned assigned quantity determined by the scheduled assigned quantity determining means.
(Appendix E3)
A notification quantity changing means (sub CPU 71) capable of changing the quantity notified by the notification means within a range of the scheduled provision quantity determined by the scheduled provision quantity determination means;
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E1 or Supplementary Note E2, wherein the notification means can notify the quantity changed by the notification quantity changing means after notifying a part of the scheduled assigned quantity .
(Appendix E4)
A third passage area (first grand prize opening 36) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A variable member (first big prize opening shutter 36A) that can be changed between a first mode in which the game medium can easily pass through the third passing region and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult to pass,
The game value giving means can give a game value on condition that a game medium has passed through the third passage area,
The advantageous game execution means includes:
First advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one first advantageous game for displacing the variable member to the first mode in the specific game state;
Second advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one second advantageous game for displacing the displacement member into the first mode in the specific game state;
In the specific game state, after executing one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game, the other can be executed,
The first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means ends on the condition that a prescribed number of game media have passed through the third passage area, according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E3 The gaming machine described.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game board 1p Game area 4 Liquid crystal display device (notification means)
26 Launcher (Launching means)
30 '2nd guide rail (guideway)
32 1st starting port (starting passage area, 1st passage area)
33 2nd starting port (starting passing area, first passing area)
34 Blade member 35 Passage gate 36 First grand prize opening (third pass area)
36A First grand prize opening shutter (variable member)
37 Grand Prize, 2nd Grand Prize (Passing area, 2nd passing area)
37A Grand prize opening shutter, 2nd grand prize opening shutter (displacement member)
41A Out port (discharge port)
43 Cover member 61 Main CPU (specific game state transition determination means, specific game state control means, advantageous game execution means)
71 Sub CPU (scheduled assigned quantity determining means)
83 Dispensing device (game value giving means)
430 Suppression unit 90 Variable winning device 91 Cover member 920 Front base plate 920c Introduction unit 921c Collection port (discharge port)
922 Main stage (displacement member)
922c Step surface (support surface)
922c 'inclined surface (support surface)
924 Upper lid (passage forming member)
924 'upper unit (passage forming member)
924b Taxiway 930 Suppression part 930 'Passage

Claims (5)

A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A passing area provided in the gaming area, through which gaming media can pass;
A displacement member displaceable in a first mode in which the passage of the game medium is easy with respect to the passing region and a second mode in which the game medium is difficult;
When the displacement member is in the first aspect, the displacement member can be positioned in the first position, and when the displacement member is in the second aspect, the displacement member is A passage forming member that can be located in two positions,
The passage forming member is
When located at the second position, it is possible to form a passage with the displacement member that can suppress the traveling speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member,
When positioned at the first position, by not forming at least a part of the passage together with the displacement member, the progression speed of the game medium flowing into the displacement member is not suppressed as compared with when positioned at the second position. Is possible and
A gaming machine characterized in that when at least a part of the passage is not formed, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member can be guided to the passage area. When the displacement member is in the second mode, the displacement member has a lower portion as it progresses from one end to the other end, and has a support surface that supports the game medium from below.
The passage region is formed at least below the other end of the support surface,
The passage is formed by the support surface and the passage forming member,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, the game medium can roll along the passage from one end of the support surface to the other end.
2. The game according to claim 1, wherein when the displacement member is in the first mode, the game medium can roll from one end portion to the other end portion of the support surface without following the passage. Machine.   The game medium that rolls along the passage when the displacement member is in the second mode has a discharge port that can be discharged out of the passage before being guided to the passage area. The gaming machine according to claim 2. Launching means capable of launching a game medium into the game area;
In the gaming area, provided separately from the passing area, a starting passing area through which game media can pass,
Game value giving means capable of giving a game value on condition that a game medium has passed through the passing area;
Specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start passage region;
Specific game state control means that can be controlled to a specific game state on the condition that a determination result indicating the transition to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means;
Advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one advantageous game for displacing the displacement member into the first mode in the specific game state;
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a prescribed number of game media have passed through the passing area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media;
In the specific game state, the advantageous game execution means determines the time when the displacement member is in the second mode before executing the advantageous game, and a specific number of game media are emitted by the emission means to the displacement member. And can be controlled to be a specific time to flow in,
When the displacement member becomes the first mode after the lapse of the specific time, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage region, whereby the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game is defined. Can be more than a few,
In the specific game state, the number of game values given by the game value grant means per one of the game media that have passed through the passage area, and the number of executions of advantageous games executed by the advantageous game execution means, Based on the planned number of game media that can pass through the passage area according to the specific time, a planned grant quantity determining means for determining a planned grant quantity of the game value in the specific game state,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a notification unit capable of reporting at least a part of the planned allocation quantity determined by the scheduled allocation quantity determination unit. Launching means capable of launching a game medium into the game area;
In the gaming area, provided separately from the passing area, a starting passing area through which game media can pass,
Game value giving means capable of giving a game value on condition that a game medium has passed through the passing area;
Specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the start passage region;
Specific game state control means that can be controlled to a specific game state on the condition that a determination result indicating the transition to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determination means;
Advantageous game execution means capable of executing at least one advantageous game for displacing the displacement member into the first mode in the specific game state;
The advantageous game ends on the condition that a prescribed number of game media have passed through the passing area,
When the displacement member is in the second mode, it is possible to flow a predetermined number of game media;
The advantageous game executing means has a time required for the first number of game media, which is less than the prescribed number, to be launched by the launching means and pass through the second passage area during execution of the advantageous game. After the displacement member is set to the first mode over the first time, the displacement member is displaced to the second mode, and the second time in the second mode is defined as the sum of the first number and the first number. It is controllable so that the second number of game media exceeding the number is fired by the launching means and flows into the displacement member,
When the displacement member becomes the first mode after the second time has elapsed, the game medium that has flowed into the displacement member passes through the passage region, so that the number of passages of the passage region in the advantageous game is It is possible to exceed the prescribed number,
In the specific game state, the number of game values given by the game value grant means per one of the game media that have passed through the passage area, and the number of executions of advantageous games executed by the advantageous game execution means, A scheduled grant quantity determining means for determining a scheduled grant quantity of a game value in a specific gaming state based on a scheduled number of game media that can pass through the passing area according to the first time and the second time;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a notification unit capable of reporting at least a part of the planned allocation quantity determined by the scheduled allocation quantity determination unit.